Home

LinePrinter Plus® Emulation for SL5000/T5000 series

1. Application Identifier Content Format Al 00 Serial Shipping Container Code n2 n18 01 Shipping Container Code n2 n14 02 Item Num of Goods Within Another Unit n2 n14 10 Batch or Lot Number n2 an 20 11 Production Date YYMMDD n24n6 13 Packaging Date YYMMDD n2 n6 15 Sell By Date Quality YYMMDD n2 n6 17 Expiration Date Safety YYMMDD n2 n6 20 Product Variant n2 n2 21 Serial Number n2 an 20 22 HIBCC Quantity Date Batch and Link n2 an 29 23 Lot Number Transitional Use n3 n 19 240 Additional Product ID Assigned By Manufacturer n3 an 30 250 Secondary Serial Number n3 an 30 30 Quantity n2 n 8 310 Net Weight Kilograms n4 n6 311 Length or 1st Dimension Meters n44n6 312 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Meters n4 n6 313 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Meters n4 n6 314 Area Square Meters n4 n6 315 Volume Liters n4 n6 316 Volume Cubic Meters n4 n6 320 Net Weight Pounds n4 n6 321 Length Or 1st Dimension Inches n4 n6 322 Length Or 1st Dimension Feet n4 n6 323 Length Or 1st Dimension Yards n4 n6 324 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Inches n4 n6 325 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Feet n4 n6 326 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Yards n4 n6 327 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Inches n4 n6 328 Depth Thickn
2. Bar Code Mnemonic aan Code Set fing Australian 4 SSCC cH Variable Alphanumeric 232 State Codabar SSCC cB Variable Alphanumeric 234 Code 39 SSCCcC Variable Alphanumeric 236 Code 93 SSCCc9 Variable Alphanumeric 238 Code 128 SSCCcD Variable Alphanumeric 240 EAN 8 SSCC c 8 7 digits Numeric 245 EAN 13 SSCC c 1 12 digits Numeric 246 FIM SSCC c F N A A B CorD 247 German l 2 5 SSCC c G 11 or 13 digits Numeric 249 Interleaved 2 5 SSCCc Variable Numeric 249 Maxicode SSCC c X Variable Alphanumeric 250 MSI SSCC c M 13 or 14 digits Numeric 252 PDF 417 SSCC c 4 Variable Alphanumeric 253 PostBar SSCC c O Variable 0 3 254 POSTNET SSCC c P 5 9 or 11 digits Numeric 255 Royal Mail SSCC c R Variable Alphanumeric 254 Telepen SSCC cT Variable Alphanumeric 256 UCC EAN 128 SSCC c V Variable Numeric 258 UPC A SSCC c A 11 digits Numeric 263 UPC E SSCC c E 11 digits Numeric 265 UPC Shipping SSCCcS 13 digits Numeric 268 UPS 11 SSCCcU 10 digits Alphanumeric 269 Bar Code Format Bar Code Format ASCII Code SSCC c t d data d N n xxxx yyyy X mmmm P p Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment C H hh D SSCC 63 t 3B d data d 3B 4E n 3B xxxx 3B yyyy 3B 58 mmmm 3B 50 p 3B 43 3B 48 hh 3B 44 SSCC 99 t 59 d data d 59 78 n 59 xxxx 59 yyyy 59 88 mmmm 59 80 p 59 67 59 72 hh 59 68 Invokes bar codes The brackets indicate optional parameters in the command
3. eins 164 Cancel Eo 165 Carriage Hetum eene nennen nennen nnne 165 Character Pitch 10 ep 165 Character Pitch 12 CDI ast beet e iens 165 Character Pitch 15 ep 166 Character Set Select International Languages 166 Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to O eese 168 Condensed Print essssssssssssseseeeeenneeeen nennen 168 Condensed Print Reset ssseeseeeeeesssrneerresreterresrererirnsrnsrrererens 169 Cut Sheet Paper Feed Control 169 Define a Download Character 169 Delete Character 4 ig tete Piet geld 169 Double High Print Set Reset ssssnsseseneseerreneerrrnnerrrsrrrrrnnreren 170 Double Strike iti eccentric caer LOL dde roD nad 171 Double Strike Cancel 171 Double Wide Print 2 coit tee a eae nt 172 Double Wide Print 1 Lime 173 Double Wide Print 1 Line Cancel 173 Emphasized Prmt necessnricnrinrs tiree aiie ar e eias 174 Emphasized Print Cancel 174 Enable Printing Hex Codes 00 1F and 80 9F ssss 175 Form Feed eren a eee iia eee Oe c sided ech 177 Graphics Standard Density ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeteneeeseaes 177 Graphics Double Density sssseeneeee 178 Graphics Double Density Double Speed 179 Table of Contents Graphics Quadruple Density cccccceceeeeeeeeeneeeseeeeeeeneeeeeneeeee 180 Half Speed Mode On Off
4. ccccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaees 57 Superscript Subscript Printing Reset essssssssss 57 Super Set Commande sse 58 Underline eee cinere ener en Beeren tete 58 VFU Commands P Series sssssseeeeeene 59 Vertical KC E 59 3 P Series XQ Printer Protocol 61 Iptroduchon E E 61 P Series XQ Default Values and Gtates sss 62 Configuring the XQ Emulation with Control Codes 64 Format for Control Code Descriptons eerren 64 Edit Mode tute ETE 64 NUE COJE iiit LE 65 Control Code Iridex se naana emait a arahanto 65 Alternate Character Set Deselect Shift In 66 Alternate Character Set Select Shift Out 67 Carriage Return nennen nennen nnns 67 Compressed Print ocior e ec RE ERA ERR ena 68 Bgm M 69 Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVEU 69 Elongated Characters Double High Print 70 Form Feed nitent eet age x 70 Eme Focie usto dis tt nte be e educ ties 71 Line Spacing 8 or 10 23 71 Plot Even Dot P Series XQ High Density Graphics 72 Plot Odd Dot P Series XQ Normal Density Graphics 73 Select Letter Gothic DP 73 Table of Contents Spaces eeben Gerbe eege al tege ege 74 Bae SI 74 Vie IR a tUe xod ie exea eio UI RE De slant aaeain 75 4 Serial Matrix Printer Protocol
5. x 4 L I gt on Ib 4 5 cS 6 v LE I LA Rei Em e on b 309 Appendix C 310 D P Series Plot Byte Definition A dot is printed at the location addressed by each of bits 1 through 6 in the data byte that is set 1 or True Consequently the binary equivalent of the plot data bytes must be known in order for specific dot positions to be addressed accurately The next page shows the P Series Plot Data byte dot patterns 311 se Le rior LILILO re SET OTITIOT OTITITO ce Set TOTITOT IOTTTTO z6 e 06 o essem esee esee ze rer oomo eco eg esscse eer roro esscee On esso reer ororior_ essoso OLIO 16 sc oer foc own omseooo X ss ss oer ooorror eseo00 fee ss oco oomo Fw u enpzr rnorr ososse 1 i cer moor ecese 2 1e s 190 RUN F5 sc sr oor orrorrr osoo s s cr orori eeceso 9 9 Fs ororo TIOIOIIO EF szpzn sr roon ososoe n s ss scr rororor esoe lt ts 590 FC L OOTOTTO F3 fer oniro fooro vs rer oororor T esosoo 5 es froo t BR o c Be o E D D o oeoo 1 5s rs a i Fs uen er roorr ocos 5 fes ex fea nooror cose ee is 99 roro 7 a RESEARCH c few eer ororor escaso c v o voro 7 E F5 acer ror rooorr oos 5 i re rer voro ec
6. ccccccceceseseeceeessseeeeeessnneeeeessseeeeeseeaas 180 Horizontal Tab Execute ccccccccccccssssssssssssssssseeseseeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeees 181 Horizontal Tab Set Release o nnnnnnnennneennnnnnnnnesnnsererennrnnnennnseene 181 Initialize Printer bet tee tee oet ee see 182 Italic Printilg creed E qr me ut riens 182 Italic Printing Cancel 182 Line Feed E 183 Line Feed n 216 NCh nennen nennen 183 Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 oi 184 Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Io 184 Line Spacing 7 72 INCH ccccesceceseeeeeseceeeseeeeeneneseeeeesesaneneeseeeeaes 185 Line Spacing 1 72 Inch 185 Line Spacing 1 216 lnch eeeececee ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeeeteaeeesaas 186 Make Hex 80 9F Control Codes nenene 187 Make Hex 80 9F Printable 187 Master Print Select sis Ene pL pd Rd eR 189 Paper Out Detection Enable sssssessssinessetrtrserrntnrrrrreerrrn renren 190 Paper Out Detection Disable renren en 190 Pass Bit 7 from Host eoa iiiaae aaa Ea eee ARANE ERER 190 Printer Deselect eatenus 191 Printer Selecz titt edt at deum 191 Reassign Graphics Mode AA 191 Remove Downloaded Characters s ssssssrneeeeerreeerirnserrnrserrrr eene 192 Select Graphics Mode eene 192 Select Italic Character Get 193 Select 9 Pin Graphics Mode 193 Select Print Quality seessessseeeeeeeeenneeeenenn nnn 194 Select Deselect Proportional Spacing eseeesseeeeeeeeeeereeeereeeeeen 194 Select Serif or Sans Serif F
7. Data Field The bar code symbol uses a nine position bar no bar pattern of tall full bars of uniform height Use the letters A B C or D to specify the type of FIM Figure 14 illustrates how to generate a horizontal FIMC bar code anda POSTNET bar code ESC CF 0 0065 0001 001 C ESC CP 0 0050 0020 009 481701892 y 0001 x 0065 gt ACME MOTOR COMPANY 17500 Cartwright Road Irvine CA 92623 y 0020 x 005 0 ldlulladisalillilsalilulillaliilul NOTE Illustration is not to scale Figure 14 Sample FIMC Bar Code 248 Interleaved 2 5 I 2 5 and German 1 2 5 Interleaved 2 5 I 2 5 and German 1 2 5 The Interleaved 2 5 and German I 2 5 bar code structure is shown in Figure 15 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION 4 eee ee ee ee ee ee rm rm ee ee rm rm em rm 1 T l UPPER GUARD BAND l m i I QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET d LOWER GUARD BAND J I l L OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 15 Interleaved 2 5 and German I 2 5 Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes Unique start and
8. If the VFU is enabled and loaded this command is ignored Form Margins Set ASCII Code SFCC v n1 n2 n3 n4 Hex Code SFCC 76 n1 n2 n3 n4 Dec Code SFCC 118 n1 n2 n3 n4 Purpose Selects left n1 right n2 top n3 and bottom n4 form margins where n1 The width of the left margin hex value in character columns at the current cpi If the requested margin is larger than the current form width right margin the value is ignored n2 The width of the right margin hex value in character columns at the current cpi If the requested margin is larger than the current form width left margin the value is ignored n3 The length of the top margin hex value in character lines at the current Ipi If the requested margin is larger than the current form length bottom margin the value is ignored n4 The length of the bottom margin hex value in character lines at the current Ipi If the requested margin is larger than the current form length top margin the value is ignored Comment A hex value of FF for n1 n2 n3 or n4 indicates that the margin remains unaffected When set the right and bottom margins take effect immediately The left margin takes effect for the current line only if no horizontal motion has occurred for the line otherwise it takes effect on the next line The top margin always takes effect on the next form 46 Line Feed Line Feed ASCII Code LF Hex Code Dec Code Purpo
9. 0 030 inch The Ascender and Descender bars are about 62 5 of the Full Height bar in length while the Tracker bar is about 25 of the Full Height bar Each bar width is equal and must be 020 inch 005 inch Horizontal spacing between bars pitch must be 22 bars 2 bars per inch over any 0 50 inch portion of the bar code The Australian 4 State bar code data field consists of four different sections the FCC Sorting Number Customer Data and Reed Solomon parity information The FCC is a two digit code specifying the format of the barcode see Table 65 The Sorting Number is an 8 digit code used to sort the mail item As shown in the following table Customer Data is allowed as indicated by the FCC selected The LP emulation automatically generates the Reed Solomon parity information and includes it in the barcode Australian 4 State Command Format FCCn Specifies the FCC code which defines the format of the barcode and its size Enter FCC then one of the values shown in Table 65 INFOn Specifies the format of the customer information field Enter INFO then one of the values shown in Table 65 Table 65 FCC Codes Customer Information Fields and Maximum Bar Code Lenghts Customer Maximum Length FCC FCCn Information Valid Data Sorting Number INFOn Customer Data 11 87 45 or 92 1 Any 8 0 59 1 A Z a z 0 9 space 8 5 59 2 0 9 8 7 59 3 0 3 8 15 44 62 1 A Z a z 0 9 space 8 10 44 62 2 0 9 8
10. 115 Vertical tab set clear 116 Serial Matrix VFU 292 Executing vertical tabs 293 Vertical tab positions 293 Serif or Sans Serif Font Epson FX 1050 Emulation 194 Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position in 1 60 Inch Epson FX 1050 Emulation 195 Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1 Epson FX 1050 Emulation 196 Set Codes Epson FX 1050 Emulation 159 Set Forms Length By Lines Epson FX 1050 Emulation 197 Set Forms Length in Inches Epson FX 1050 Emulation 198 Set Intercharacter Spacing in n 120 Inch Epson FX 1050 Emulation 196 Set Margin Left Epson FX 1050 Emulation 196 Set Margin Right Epson FX 1050 Emulation 197 Skip Over Perforation Epson FX 1050 Emulation 199 Serial Matrix Emulation 112 Skip Over Perforation Cancel Epson FX 1050 Emulation 200 Serial Matrix Emulation 113 Slew Speed Print engine options 223 Software features 18 Software Page Eject Super Set Programming 225 Space P Series XQ Emulation 74 Special information 17 Start Load Code Hex 1E or 6E P Series EVFU 287 States Epson FX 1050 Emulation 154 P Series Emulation 22 P Series XQ Emulation 62 Serial Matrix Emulation 78 Superscript and Subscript Printing Cancel Epson FX 1050 Emulation 201 Superscript Subscript Printing Epson FX 1050 Emulation 201 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 149 P Series Emulation 57 Serial Matrix Emulation 113 Superscript Subscript Printing Reset IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation 149 P Series Emulation 57
11. 116 86 87 88 94 94 81 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes 82 FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE Print Attributes Continued Overscoring ESC n 108 Print Mode Pitch Selection ESC X mn 108 ESC nq Superscript Subscript Printing ESCS n 118 Superscript Subscript Printing Reset ESC T 114 Underline ESC n 114 Graphics Bit Image Mode Single Density ESCK n1 n2 84 Bit Image Mode Double Density ESC L n1 n2 84 Bit Image Mode Double Density Double Speed ESC Y n1 n2 85 Bit Image Mode Quadruple Density ESC Z n1 n2 86 Other Functions Bell BEL 83 Character Set Select ESC I xyz 89 Characters 80 9F Control Codes ESC 7 91 Characters 80 9F Printable Symbols ESC 6 91 Characters 80 9F Printable Symbols ESC u 92 Character Set Select International Languages ESC Rn 92 Emulation Reset ESC 97 Extended Character Set ESC 4 99 Extended Character Set Cancel ESC 5 100 Printer Select DC1 112 Printer Deselect DC3 112 Super Set Commands ESC 114 Backspace Backspace ASCII Code BS Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example Bell 08 8 Moves the logical print head to the left one character space toward the first character column Moves the character position indicator one character space to the left at the current character pitch setting The code is ignored if the logical print head is positioned at the first character column If you were to print five T characters then two BS commands
12. 272 273 Vertical Image Shift Print engine options 224 Vertical page formatting overview 285 Vertical tab IBM Proprinter Ill XL Emulation 151 P Series XQ Emulation 75 Serial Matrix Emulation 115 Vertical Tab Channel Epson FX 1050 Emulation 195 Vertical Tab Execute Epson FX 1050 Emulation 203 Vertical Tab Positions Serial Matrix VFU 293 Vertical Tab Set Clear Epson FX 1050 Emulation 203 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 152 Serial Matrix Emulation 116 Vertical Tabs in Channels Emulation 199 Vertical tab P Series Emulation 59 VFU commands P Series Emulation 59 VFU Load Save Clear 286 W Epson FX 1050 Warnings 17 750928 001G
13. CONTROL CODE VT MOVES PAPER TO THE NEXT VERTICAL TAB THIS IS LINE TWENTY 6 Epson FX 1050 Printer Protocol Introduction This chapter describes the Epson FX emulation host control codes Emulation refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language A printer control language is the coding system used to convey manipulate and print data It contains character codes and command sequences that configure the emulation In this manual the terms emulation printer protocol and printer control language are synonymous In Epson FX emulation mode your printer can print files coded for the Epson FX printer control language To select the Epson FX emulation as the active printer emulation select Epson FX from the Printer Control menu as described in the User s Manual The Epson FX emulation provides many configurable parameters The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 35 You can modify these parameter values in two ways The Epson FX host control codes An extensive set of Epson FX control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the Epson FX control code commands The printer configuration menus You can modify a subset of the Epson FX emulation parameters using the control panel keys and LCD display as described in the User s Manual A para
14. Double Wide Print One Line Only 98 Extended Character Get 99 Extended Character Set Cancel Primary Character Set Select 100 Form Feed EE 100 Table of Contents Forms Length Set nches 100 Forms Length Set Lines 101 Form Margins Get 102 Horizontal Tab EE 102 Horizontal Tab Setari ee te Anew biis 103 LING EGed dead ee DP REG EE 103 Line Feed n 216 Inch One Line On 104 Line Spacing 1 6 Inch n 105 Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Io 105 Line Spacing 7 72 Meher te enere eae aneen ae aa aiae eene 106 Line Spacing 1 72 Inch 106 Line Spacing 1 216 lnch 107 OVEISCOMING WEE 108 Print Mode Pitch Selection seeeeseeeseeeireereesinesrirerirserrnerrreerens 108 Printer D SCIOCE ceeeeececeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeseeseneeeseeeseeeeeeeenees 112 Printer Select E 112 Skip Over Pertoratton sese 112 Skip Over Perforation Cancel sesesesesseiesrirerrierrrierrrerrrserrrern 113 Superscript Subscript Printing 113 Superscript Subscript Printing Reset eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen 114 Super Set Commande 114 Underline orte ete ee averte erue 114 Vertical Tab E 115 Vertical Tab SeUGClear ni re iet a een catre Te dob ee deti 116 5 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Printer Protocol 117 Introduction T N A a 117 Proprinter III XL Emulation Default Gettings 118 Configuring the Proprinter III XL Emulation with Control Codes sssesseesseeseesereeriseerir
15. Each set of five bars comprised of two tall bars and three short bars represents one of the five digits of the zip code plus the four digit zip code extension If the Advanced Bar Code is used an additional two digit code is also added to make an 11 digit data field Check Digit The sixth tenth or twelfth digit represents the automatic check digit character for the 5 9 or 11 digit data field respectively The check digit is added automatically to verify accurate scanning Telepen The Telepen structure is shown in Figure 20 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION e wee ee ee ee ee rm rm ee ee ee rm re rm rm 1 T UPPER GUARD BAND I l MES i QUIET START DATA FIELD stop quiet ZONE CODE CODE ZONE HEIGHT o es el I I LOWER GUARD BAND L J OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 20 Telepen Structure Telepen Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scann
16. In ESC X mn m Print Mode code n Pitch cpi An asterisk hex 2A may be substituted for m or n Whenever the asterisk replaces m or n then its current value does not change Values other than those shown in Table 24 and Table 25 are ignored where In ESC nq n Print Mode Pitch code values other than those shown in Table 23 are ignored q Command sequence terminator NOTE The print mode must be changed before the first printable symbol of a print line or the command sequence is deferred until the next line 108 Print Mode Pitch Selection Comment Print mode and pitch can also be selected from the control panel The print mode pitch select control code from the host computer overrides the control panel print mode setting and the print mode and pitch selection are reflected on the message display A complete set of tables identifying pitch and dot densities for all print modes follows Table 23 Print Mode and Pitch ESC nq n Print Mode and Pitch 1 31 Courier 10 cpi 2 32 Letter Gothic 10 cpi 3 33 Letter Gothic 12 cpi 4 34 Letter Gothic 12 cpi 5 35 Letter Gothic 13 cpi 109 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Table 24 Horizontal and Vertical Dot Density ESC X Horiz Density m Hex Resolution Vertical Density Print Mode 0 30 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 1 31 X dpi y dpi Courier 2 32 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 3 33 X dpi y
17. Latin Amll 3E Danish ll Spanish ll Latin Il 35 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Table 7 International Character Sets n Character Set Selected Se PSET ECMA Latin 1 0 437 6 0280 Multinational MEE c OE SE 14 OF GEI 15 10 40 16 11 41 17 currently undefined 12 42 18 13 43 19 14 44 20 15 45 21 Comment The international character set can also be selected from the control panel The control code setting overrides the control panel character set selection Values other than those selectable from Table 7 are ignored Example The following example illustrates international character selection using the IBM PC character set CONTROL CODE ESC R 5 SELECTS THE SWEDISH CHARACTER SET SHOWN BENEATH THE USA CASCII CHARACTERS qucm e ops R BCODE ABCDAOA 86 Download A Character Set Overlay ASCII Code SFCC V Hex Code SFCC 56 Dec Code SFCC 86 Purpose To define and download a character set overlay substitution table that can be placed within the 224 printable symbol code points Expression SFCC V is followed by ASCII characters QQQ E AAA E SSSSS E Each parameter is separated by paired brace symbols for clarity in distinguishing parameters Do not put the braces in the command sequence Multiple sets of characters can follow one SFCC V 36 where Comment Download A Character Set Overlay E is the terminator following
18. OCR Parity check Parsing PI Pin configuration Pitch Pixel Point Print Mode Acronym of NonVolatile Random Access Memory See also nonvolatile memory O Optical Character Recognition is the process by which a machine reads characters printed in a special standardized font Data are read by a photoelectric optical scanner and recorded on magnetic tape or disk OCR A and OCR B are two widely used fonts P Parity checking is the addition of non data bits to data resulting in the number of 1 bits being either always even or always odd Parity is used to detect transmission errors Parity represents the value in the check digit of the received or transmitted data Parsing is the process of separating a programming statement into basic units that can be translated into machine instructions A printer can recover from an erroneous code sequence by performing as much of the function as possible or parsing the valid parameter from the invalid Paper instruction A signal from the host with the same timing and polarity as the data lines Establishes the physical attachment and protocol conversion connections for the host interface The number of text characters printed per horizontal inch Specified in characters per inch or cpi Acronym of picture element or picture cell The smallest displayable picture element on a video monitor or printable unit in a printer A unit of measure in printing and typography
19. SP 20 3A T 54 n 6E 21 3B 22 3C 23 3D 24 3E 25 3F 26 40 27 41 28 42 5C 29 43 5D 2A 44 5E 2B 45 5F 2C 46 60 2D 47 61 2E 48 62 2F 49 63 7D 30 4A 64 7E 31 4B 65 7F 32 4C 66 FNC 3 23 See NOTE 33 4D 67 FNC 2 22 See NOTE 34 4E 68 SHIFT 28 See NOTE 35 4F i 69 CODEC 27 See NOTE 36 50 j 6A FUNC4 24 See NOTE 37 51 6B CODEA 25 See NOTE 38 52 6C FNC 1 21 See NOTE 39 53 6D START B STOP 55 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 6F 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7A 7B 7C 2 TD O ex ge M ee Se de r 0 gt A B C D E F G H tm a HN e X c o oO Jo o EF o Mo oO Dovoz zr ac 243 Chapter 7 Bar Codes Table 71 Code 128C Charcter Set 38 31 82 38 32 83 38 33 84 38 34 85 38 35 86 38 36 87 38 37 88 38 38 89 38 39 90 39 30 91 39 31 92 39 32 93 39 33 94 39 34 95 39 35 96 39 36 97 39 37 98 39 38 99 39 39 CODEB 26 See NOTE CODEA 25 See NOTE FNC1 21 See NOTE START C N A STOP N A 244 EAN 8 EAN 8 The EAN 8 bar code structure is shown in Figure 11 and described below SR SC CENTER CODE POSITION START CODE STOR C CODE f 1 QUIET ZONE L 2 OPTIONAL READABLE L DATA FIELD FIELD Figure 11 EAN 8 Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent ad
20. V i W SOH A A A A a A STX B B B B B b B ETX C C C C C C EOT D D D D d D ENQ E E E E e E ACK F amp IF F F f F BEL G IG G G g G BS H H H H h H HT l N i l LF J i IJ J J j J VT K K K K k K FF L L L L L CR M M M m M SO N N N n N SI O JO O O o O DLE P 0 0 P P p P DC Q 1 1 Q Q q Q DC2 R 2 2 R R r R DC3 S 3 3 S S S S DC4 T 4 4 T T t T NAK U 5 5 U U u U SYN V 6 6 V V V V ETB w 7 7 W W W W CAN X 8 8 X X X X EM Y 9 9 Y Y y Y SUB z IZ Z Z z Z ESC 96A A F K P FS B lt G L Q GS C H M R RS D gt l A N 968 US GE J E 0 DEL 9eT YX LY WZ NOTE Character pairs M N and P through Y are reserved for future control character pairs 237 Chapter 7 Bar Codes Code 93 The Code 93 bar code structure is shown in Figure 9 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC p POSITION e i m i us s degt mo ma deeg ef eg asm 1 I UPPER GUARD BAND I r oro I QUIET START STOP QUIET EIC ed LOWER GUARD BAND l Figure 9 Code 93 Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The
21. must either be 1284 or SERIAL Cfg may be 1 8 or ALL DOWNLOAD Cfg This command saves the configuration data that follows as configuration Cfg Cfg must be 1 8 or END RESET Reboots the printer 299 Appendix B Command The PTR_SETUP Commands Table 81 PTR_SETUP Commands continued Sub Command Parameter Description LP MODE n a Protocol Protocol must be 0 4 This command resets the software protocol and is selected as follows 0 P Series 1 P Series XQ 2 Serial Matrix 3 Proprinter III XL 4 Epson FX 1050 FILE IO DISK IO CAPTURE Filename Captures all incoming data into a file named Filename Receipt of a FILE IO CAPTURE command without the Filename parameter will force the file data to be written to flash and will end the file capture DRIVE DEL Letter Filename This command is parsed for backwards compatibility However since the flash file system is a single device the drive letter will be ignored The DEL command will mark a file as deleted The space the file occupied will be freed the next time the printer is powered up FILE IO DISK IO RUNFILE MAXSIZE File Prop Kb The RUNFILE command will open the file named File for printing After the PTR END command is processed the contents of File will get printed before any more data is read from the host If the Prop field is present RUNFILE will verify
22. number of columns from the left edge of the physical page to the beginning of the print line n 1 through 232 hex 00 through hex E8 Purpose Sets the left margin to n columns in the current font Comment Be sure to use the alphabetic lowercase l as in left rather than the uppercase i I for this command The number of inches of margin does not vary if the font character width or horizontal dot density changes This command automatically clears and resets horizontal tabs to every eight characters The smallest possible space between the left and right margins is the width of one double wide 10 cpi character If a margin control code violates this minimum distance it is ignored Settings in proportional mode are treated as 10 cpi 196 Set Margin Right Set Margin Right ASCII Code ESC Qn Hex Code Dec Code where Purpose Comment 1B51n 2781n n number of columns from the left edge of the physical page to the end of the print line n 1 through 232 hex 00 through hex E8 Sets the right margin to n columns at the current character width The number of inches of margin does not vary if the font character width or horizontal dot density changes This command automatically clears and resets horizontal tabs to every eight characters The smallest possible space between the left and right margins is the width of one double wide 10 cpi character If a margin control code violates this minimum dist
23. the data is used 108 times rather than 27 QUAD DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS DAERAH Bold Print Set ASCII Code ESC G Hex Code 1B 47 Dec Code 27 71 Purpose Selects bold character printing Comment When the bold character printing control code is received all characters are printed in bold until reset by the bold print reset control code or printer reset Bold Print is the same as printing double strike Example The following sample illustrates bold character printing CONTROL CODE ESC G SELECTS BOLD CHARACTER PRINTING FOR EXAMPLE AaBbCcDdEeFfGgHhI iJ jKkL 1MmNnOoPp CONTROL CODE ESC H CANCELS BOLD CHARACTER PRINTING Bold Print Cancel ASCII Code ESC H Hex Code 1B 48 Dec Code 2772 Purpose Cancels bold printing Comment No other print attributes are changed 126 Bottom Margin Set Bottom Margin Set ASCII Code ESC Nn Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment 1B4En 27 78 n Selects the number of lines at the current line spacing for the paper skip at the bottom of the perforated page n 1 through 255 hex 01 through hex FF to select the number of lines to skip If the value of n exceeds the current forms length it is ignored The actual distance set is the product of n and the current line spacing Factory default value disables bottom margin The current default value may be set by the operator Setting a new forms length ESC C resets the bottom margin to zero If the di
24. then two characters the output would look like the sample below TTTFF ASCII Code BEL Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 07 7 Sounds the printer s buzzer beeper The BEL function sounds the buzzer beeper for 0 2 seconds upon receipt of this command 83 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Bit Image Mode Single Density ASCII Code ESC K n1 n2 Hex Code 1B 4B n1 n2 Dec Code 2775 n1 n2 Purpose Selects Single Normal Density Bit Image graphics where n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment For detailed information see the Bit Image section in Chapter 8 Example The following example produces a pattern of Single Density Bit Image graphics The 9 data bit pattern is repeated 27 times Compare this example to the double density and quadruple density examples SINGLE DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS Bit Image Mode Double Density ASCII Code ESC L n1 n2 Hex Code 1B 4C n1 n2 Dec Code 2776 n1 n2 Purpose Selects Double Density Bit Image graphics where n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format
25. used to specify type sizes heights of font characters etc There are 72 points in a vertical inch thus one point equals 1 72 inch or approximately 0 0138 inch Examples this is e point type This is 10 point type This is 16 point type The horizontal and vertical dot density at which the characters are printed Print Pitch Printer Configuration Printer Interface Protocol RAM Read Reset Resolution ROM Defines the number of characters that can be printed in one inch It can be translated into the width of the character The operating properties that define how the printer responds to signals and commands received from the host computer These properties are set to match the operating characteristics of the host computer system The point where the data line from the host computer plugs into the printer A set of rules or conventions governing the exchange of information between computer systems For computer printers a protocol is the coding convention used to convey and print data A printer protocol includes character codes printer function codes and machine to machine communication codes R Random Access Memory Also called main memory or working memory this is the active memory of a printer into which programs are loaded RAM is said to be volatile because data in RAM are lost when power is turned off or interrupted Compare with ROM To retrieve data from memory or mass s
26. 000 Code Page 437 001 Code Page 850 P Series 000 IBM PC 001 Multinational 002 ECMA 94 Latin 1 003 DEC Multinational Epson 000 IBM PC 005 Code Page 850 Parameter n5 selects a 4 digit point size 1 4 point resolution The horizontal pitch cpi is automatically adjusted based on the point size selected Examples The following command selects the Courier typeface a fixed pitch font It also sets the point size to 12 which corresponds to 6 Ipi and 10 cpi SSCC F 93952 x ix x 0048 The following command enables the left slant attribute and sets the point size to 100 SSCC F 0009 x 279 0400 The following command selects the Futura typeface which is a proportional font It also enables the bold print attribute and disables the slant attribute SSCC F 91810 1 0 xxx xxxx 210 Font Size Font Size ASCII Code SSCC S n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 n6 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Printer Protocol n4 Symbol Set SSCC 53 n1 3B n2 3B n3 3B n4 3B n5 3B n6 3B SSCC 83 n1 59 n2 59 n3 59 n4 59 n5 59 n6 59 Selects fixed pitch and proportional font attributes with character size specified in terms of width and height in inches Parameters n1 through n6 are specified as ASCII digit values If a non digit is used in any parameter the value remains unchanged The following paragraphs explain how to set various options using ASCII digit values for each parameter where Parameter n1 identifies a specific
27. 1 0 1 1 1 8 18 24 CAN 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 9 19 25 EM 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 10 1A 26 SUB 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 11 1B 27 ESC 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 12 VT 1C 28 FS 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 13 1D 29 GS 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 14 1E 30 RS 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 Start Load 1F 31 US 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 End Load X Undefined 0 or 1 1 High 0 Low Clearing the EVFU Memory 290 The following actions reset clear the EVFU memory e Sending only the start load code e Sending a start load code followed immediately by an end load code e Asecond start load code is received resulting in reinitialization of the EVFU This allows the host data to be restarted When the EVFU memory is cleared the forms length returns to the previously set value and the current print position becomes the top of form TOF Relative Line Slewing Relative Line Slewing Another method of moving paper using the PI signal line results in vertical slews of a specified number of lines within the form relative to the current print line rather than slewing to a specific line For this to occur three criteria must be met e The PI signal line must be enabled and set high e Data bit 5 must be 1 set and e The EVFU must be the selected Vertical Format Unit The Slew Relative configuration and the state of data bits 1 through 4 determine the number of lines slewed as described in Table 80 Note that the state of data bit 5 is the difference between line slewing and using the interface lines a
28. 15SFCC 111 SFCC 53 Cancels Extended Character Set as selected by SO SFCC SO SFCC n and SFCC 4 and selects the Primary Character Set Used in 7 bit systems If data bit 8 is disabled this control code selects the range as if data bit 8 is set to 0 and data is printed as characters from hex 20 through 7F See the Extended Character Set example Form Feed Form Feed ASCII Code FF Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment DC 12 Prints the data in the buffer advances the paper position to the next top of form and moves the character position to the first character column The default forms length is determined by the configuration in nonvolatile memory Forms length is set by using the control panel or forms length control codes Code FF cancels all single line only print attributes The Form Feed command reacts differently when the VFU is active See Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting beginning on page 285 Forms Length Set Inches ASCII Code SFCC INCHES n f Purpose where Comment Sets the length of forms paper in inches n whole numbers from 1 through 24 hex 01 through hex 18 to specify the number of inches on a page f fractional number in 5 inch increments the minimum forms length is 0 5 inches Upon receipt of this code the current line becomes the first line of the form and the form length set becomes the current forms length Vertical tab positions set below the bott
29. 184 Line spacing 1 8 inch 184 Line spacing 7 72 inch 185 Master print select 189 NUL code 159 overview 153 Paper out detection disable 190 Paper out detection enable 190 Pass Bit 7 from host 190 Print modes for character sets 160 Printer deselect 191 Printer select 191 Printing hex codes 00 1F and 80 9F 175 Reassign graphics mode 191 Relative horizontal print position in n 120 inch 198 Remove downloaded characters 192 Reset Codes 159 Select graphics mode 192 Select print quality 194 Select deselect proportional spacing 194 Serif or Sans Serif font 194 Set absolute horizontal print position in 1 60 inch 195 Set Bit 7 of incoming data bytes to 1 196 Set codes 159 Set forms length by lines 197 Set forms length in inches 198 Set intercharacter spacing in n 120 inch 196 Set margin left 196 Set margin right 197 Skip over perforation 199 Skip over perforation cancel 200 states 154 Superscript and subscript printing cancel 201 Superscript Subscript Printing 201 Super set commands 200 Underline 202 Unidirectional printing set reset 202 Unidirectional printing 1 line 202 User defined font 195 Vertical tab channel 195 Vertical tab execute 203 Vertical tab set clear 203 Vertical tabs in channels 199 9 Pin graphics mode 193 Error Recover Print engine options 218 Escape Control Code Header IBM Proprinter Ill XL Emulation 120 Serial Matrix Emulation
30. 27 103 Purpose Sets character pitch to 15 characters per inch cpi Comment This command is not defined in Epson FX printers It is included in this emulation for compatibility with the Okidata KX P1180 printer This command is available in all print modes except OCR A and OCR B Character Set Select International Languages ASCII Code ESCR n Hex Code 1B52n Dec Code 2782n Purpose X Specifies a language overlay that prints the characters shown in Table 20 when the specified code is invoked Table 38 on page 160 provides information on print mode support for each character set where n hex 0 through hex E to determine the language overlay shown in Table 39 below Epson only defines character sets through hex C 166 Character Set Select International Languages Table 39 Epson International Character Sets 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E Then International Character Set Is USA French German English UK Danish Swedish Italian Spanish Japanese Norwegian Danish II Spanish II Latin American French Canadian Latin American II Comment Example Hex Codes 23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E di L N J d d i i y H o 5 a j d 8 A D S a oO B E po i po S GE 0 A e o Uu E A D A Oo H 0 i R i c 8 TO A o4 7 t C XY ji i ko 7 H DE t A a E
31. 60 dpi or 198 bytes for a horizontal dot density of 90 dpi If Auto Line Feed is disabled any bytes over the maximum are lost If the maximum is exceeded and Auto Line Feed is enabled a Line Feed LF is forced and the remaining plot data is printed as text on the next line 280 Plot Data Line Format Normal Density Plot For normal density plot the plot line contains Control Code hex 05 plot data bytes and a Line Terminator hex OA or hex OC The control sequence for sending the P Series Normal Density Plot is 1 2 3 Send the plot command code ENQ hex 05 Send the plot data bytes Send a line terminator either a Line Feed LF hex 0A or a Form Feed FF hex OC A Carriage Return CR may also be used instead of the LF code provided the Carriage Return has been configured for Carriage Return Carriage Return Line Feed CR CR LF a Aline feed hex OA used as the line terminator plots the contents of the buffer and advances the paper position a single dot row based on the vertical density of the current mode b Aform feed hex OC used as the line terminator plots the contents of the buffer and advances the paper to the next TOF Regardless of which line terminator code is sent the emulation defaults to the previously selected print mode unless further plot control codes are provided with the data Double Density Plot For double density plot the plot line contains Control Code hex 04 plot data
32. 77 Je ugeet Le EE 77 Serial Matrix Default Values and Gates 78 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes 80 Format for Control Code Descriptons rererere 80 Escape Control Code Header 80 Attribute Set and Reset Codes A 80 Control Code Index sssssssseseseseeeeneeeennen enne 81 eI cloro 83 Bell 3 Bee CD Een uU 83 Bit Image Mode Single Density ssssssseseees 84 Bit Image Mode Double Density eseeeeee 84 Bit Image Mode Double Density Double Speed 85 Bit Image Mode Quadruple Density 86 Bold Print Set siiis creto exe aia Er oda reta dnt Pea URS 86 Bold Print Reset AA 87 lerne M EU 87 Carriage EE EE 88 Character Pitch 10 ep 88 Character Pitch 12 ep 89 Character Set Select A 89 Characters 80 9F Control Codesl 91 Characters 80 9F Printable Gvmbols AA 91 Characters 80 9F Printable Gvmbols AA 92 Character Set Select International Languages 92 Condensed Print A 94 Condensed Print Reset ssssssssssseeeeneeeeenns 94 Delete eee EROR REIS ee 94 Elongated Double High Print One Line Only 95 Elongated Double High Print Geteset 96 Emphasized Print aoieanna AENA EATE AANE MAT AEEA nennen 96 Emphasized Print Heset 97 Emulation Reset ue Lee lo peti ee 97 Expanded Double Wide Print 98 Expanded
33. 8 inch line spacing control code is received all lines are printed at 8 Ipi until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting The following example illustrates 1 8 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC O SETS LINE SPACING AT 1 8 INCH 8 LPI FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED 141 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Line Spacing 7 72 Inch 10 3 Ipi ASCII Code ESC 1 Hex Code 1B 31 Dec Code 27 49 Purpose Specifies the line spacing at 7 72 inch 10 3 Ipi increments Comment When the 7 72 inch line spacing control code is received all lines are printed at the 7 72 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting and the message display reflects the line spacing as 10 3 lines per inch Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript overlapping lines may occur Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap Example The following example illustrates 7 72 inch line spacing PAN RAE ORAN o HPRERHEN Tnb eren 142 Line Spacing n 72 Inch Line Spacing n 72 Inch ASCII Code ESC An Hex Code 1B41n Dec Code 2765n
34. BIN you would use the following command IPTR SETUP CONFIG LOAD 4 FILE IO CAPTURE BIN PTR END Table 81 lists all the command sub command and parameter combinations and gives a brief description of the command NOTE When a file system error occurs a message will be displayed on the front panel indicating the error and the action needed to take to correct the error 298 Commands Table 81 PTR SETUP Commands Command Sub Command Parameter Description CONFIG LOAD Cfg Cfg can be 0 8 The PTR SETUP will load configuration Cfg If configuration Cfg was not previously saved the operator panel will display an error message and the current configuration will be kept SAVE Cfg Cfg must be 1 8 This command will save the current configuration as configuration Cfg If Cfg is not in the range of 1 8 the command is ignored POWERUP Cfg Sets the power up configuration to Cfg and loads Configuration Cfg Cfg can be any value from 0 8 where 0 is the factory default PRINT Cfg Print Configuration Cfg Cfg can be a number 1 8 or one of four pre defined configurations The four non numeric configurations are requested using the first character for the CURRENT FACTORY POWERUP or ALL configuration s CONFIG DELETE Cfg Deletes Configuration number Cfg Cfg must be in the range of 1 8 UPLOAD Port Cfg This command uploads the configuration stored in location Cfg to the port specified by Port Port
35. DC4 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 14 20 Cancels the double wide print for one line only selected by SO or ESC SO This command cancels the double wide print selected by SO or ESC SO but does not cancel double wide printing selected by ESC W or ESC 173 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Emphasized Print ASCII Code ESC E Hex Code 1B 45 Dec Code 2769 Purpose X Selects emphasized character print format Comment Emphasized print makes text bolder This command is available in both LG Letter Gothic and Courier modes Example The following sample illustrates emphasized character printing CONTROL CODE ESC E SELECTS EMPHASIZED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE ESC F CANCELS EMPHASIZED CHARACTER PRINTING Emphasized Print Cancel ASCII Code ESC F Hex Code 1B 46 Dec Code 27 70 Purpose Cancels emphasized character printing selected by ESC E or ESC Comment This command is available in both LG Letter Gothic and Courier modes 174 Enable Printing Hex Codes 00 1F and 80 9F Enable Printing Hex Codes 00 1F and 80 9F ASCII Code ESC I n uppercase i Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment 1B 49 n 2773n Permits you to print hex codes 00 1F and 80 9F n 1 allows hex codes 00 1F and 80 9F to be printable and to be used for user defined characters n O returns hex 00 1F and 80 9F to control codes The printable characters th
36. Dec Code 2747c Purpose Selects a vertical tab channel set by ESC b where c 0 through 7 Comment Subsequent VT hex OB commands use tab table specified by c If no tab table is selected channel 0 is used Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position in 1 60 Inch ASCII Code ESC n1 n2 Hex Code 1B 24 n1 n2 Dec Code 27 36 n1 n2 Purpose Moves the logical print head to an absolute horizontal print position using 1 60 inch increments where n1 256n2 the unsigned distance in inches 60 from the left margin Comment If the distance goes beyond right margin the sequence is ignored 195 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1 ASCII Code ESC gt Hex Code 1B 3E Dec Code 27 62 Purpose Sets the most significant bit MSB of all incoming data to 1 Comment The MSB is bit number 7 This command affects only text and control code data Graphics data pass through unchanged Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1 120 Inch ASCII Code ESC SP n Hex Code 1B20n Dec Code 2732n Purpose Permits character spacing adjustments in 1 120 inch increments where n 0 through 127 hex 00 through 7F Comment Setting n 0 restores normal intercharacter spacing ESC SP n SETS INTERCHARACTER SPACING FOR EXAMPLE THIS IS WIDE CHARACTER SPACING AND THIS IS NORMAL CHARACTER SPACING Set Margin Left ASCII Code ESC n Hex Code 1B6Cn Dec Code 27108n where n
37. EES 31 Characters 80 9F Control Codesl 33 Characters 80 9F Printable Gvmbols AA 33 Character Set Select ECMA 94 Latin 1 Extended 34 Character Set Select International Languages 35 Download A Character Set Overlay sse 36 Elongated Double High Print One Line Only 39 Elongated Double High Print Geteset 40 Ermphasized Pririt neo rer tip be Ed ii tek te rider 41 Emphasized Print Heset a A A a 41 Emulation Heset A 42 Expanded Double Wide Pint 42 Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only 43 Extended Character Get 43 Extended Character Set Cancel Primary Character Set Select 44 Form Feed oe ee EE Secus Ede donus 45 Table of Contents Forms Length Set nches 45 Forms Length Set Lines 46 Form Margins Get 46 Line Feed c 47 Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 oi 48 Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Io 49 Line Spacing 8 or 10 3 Ipi One Line Only ssssse 49 Line Spacing 7 72 Inch 50 Line Spacing 1 72 Inch 51 Line Spacing 1 216 lnch 52 OVEISCOMING WEE 52 Plot Even Dot P Series High Density Graphics 53 Plot Odd Dot P Series Normal Density Graphics eseeesseeeeen 53 Print Mode Pitch Selection cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeseeeessaaees 54 Superscript Subscript Printing
38. ENQ 73 Underline z 74 Page Format Carriage Return CR 67 Channels 1 through 14 DLE through US 69 See NOTE below Delete DEL 69 Line Spacing 8 or 10 3 Ipi ACK 71 Space SP 74 NOTE Channel codes hex 10 through 1F are used when the PI line is disabled For the applicable PI enable channel codes see Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting 65 Chapter 66 3 Configuring the XQ Emulation with Control Codes Other Functions Alternate Character Set Deselect Shift In Sl Alternate Character Set Select Shift Out SO BS See NOTE below Compressed Print SOH ETX HT See NOTE below Elongated Characters BS SO See NOTE below Select Letter Gothic DP STX ETX HT 66 67 68 70 73 NOTE A code can be assigned by changing the configuration at the control panel For further details refer to your User s Manual Alternate Character Set Deselect Shift In ASCII Code SI Hex Code OF Dec Code 15 Purpose This code selects the primary character set Comment The alternate character set select and deselect codes can be used to mix primary and alternate characters on a single line The main character set is also automatically selected when a line terminator code is received Example THE ALTERNATE CHARACTER SET SELECT CODE OE HEX IEF p E EtA EP ERU EE En EE bt per h bir tH Ey ot bef Sl 8 HP enkt r p apa alle Fa mr L g tttt YTHE PRIMARY CHARACTER SET IS RESELECTED Alternate Character Set Sele
39. Matrix Emulation 80 Attribute set P Series Emulation 26 Australian 4 State Bar Code 232 select P Series XQ Backspace Epson FX 1050 Emulation 164 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 123 Serial Matrix Emulation 83 Backspace P Series Emulation 28 Bar Code Australian 4 State 232 Codabar 234 Code 128 240 Code 39 236 Code 93 238 EAN 13 246 EAN 8 245 FIM 247 format 227 Interleaved 2 5 and German 1 2 5 249 Maxicode 250 MSI 252 overview 226 PDF 417 253 PostBar and Royal Mail 254 POSTNET 255 Telepen 256 UCC EAN 128 258 UPC Shipping 268 UPC A 263 UPC E 265 UPS 11 269 Bell Epson FX 1050 Emulation 164 IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation 123 P Series Emulation 28 Serial Matrix Emulation 83 Binary Data Byte Sample 272 Bit image density Graphics 275 Bit Image Mode Double Density IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation 124 Serial Matrix Emulation 84 Bit Image Mode Double Density Double Speed IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 125 Serial Matrix Emulation 85 Bit Image Mode Quadruple Density IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation 125 Serial Matrix Emulation 86 Bit Image Mode Single Density IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation 124 Serial Matrix Emulation 84 Bit Image Pattern Graphics 273 Plan Sample 274 Bit Image Programming Format Graphics 276 Bit Image Graphics 272 Bold Print Cancel IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation 126 325 Bold Print Reset P Series Emulation 29 Serial Matrix Emulation 87 Bold Prin
40. Primary Character Set Select ASCII Code ESC 5 Hex Code 1B35 Dec Code 2753 Purpose Cancels Extended Character Set as selected by ESC 4 and selects the Primary Character Set Comment This code is used in 7 bit systems as if data bit 8 was set to O If data bit 8 is disabled this control code selects the range as if data bit 8 is set to 0 and data is printed as characters from hex 20 through hex 7F Example See the Extended Character Set example Form Feed ASCII Code FF Hex Code OC Dec Code 12 Purpose Prints the data in the buffer advances the paper position to the next top of form and moves the character position to the first character column Comment The default forms length is determined by the configuration in nonvolatile memory Forms length is set by using the control panel or forms length control codes Code FF cancels all single line only print attributes The Form Feed command reacts differently when the VFU is active See Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting Forms Length Set Inches ASCII Code ESC C NUL n Hex Code 1B4300n Dec Code 27670n Purpose Sets the length of forms paper in inches where n whole numbers from 1 through 24 hex 01 through hex 18 to specify the number of inches on a page 100 Comment Forms Length Set Lines Upon receipt of this code the current line becomes the first line of the form and the form length set becomes the current forms length Vertical ta
41. Purpose Stores a line spacing of n 72 inch increments where n 1 through 85 hex 01 through hex 55 all others are ignored Comment When the ESC A control sequence is received all line feed commands following an ESC 2 sequence are at n 72 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting and the message display reflects the line spacing in lines per inch Small values of n may result in overlapping lines Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript characters are used on the same line Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap Example The following example illustrates 35 72 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC A 35 SETS LINE SPACING AT 35 72 INCH INCREMENTS FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER LINE SPACING IS SELECTED The ESC 2 sequence page 132 asserts the line spacing that was stored by the preceding ESC A sequence 143 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Line Spacing n 216 Inch ASCII Code ESC 3 n Hex Code 1B33n Dec Code 2751n Purpose Specifies the line spacing at n 216 inch increments where n 1 through 255 hex 01 through hex FF Comment When the n 216 inch line spacing control code is received all line feeds following are at n 216 inch line s
42. SPACING AT 1 8 INCH 8 LPI FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED Line Spacing 8 or 10 3 Ipi One Line Only ASCII Code ACK SFCC f Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example 06 SFCC 66 6 SFCC 102 Selects line spacing of 8 or 10 3 Ipi for the current line only The default line spacing is reselected automatically after one line Line spacing may be selected either through the control panel or by line spacing control codes The control code setting overrides the control panel line spacing setting If the alternate line spacing selected from the control panel is 8 Ipi the ACK control code sets the line spacing to 8 Ipi If 10 3 Ipi was selected from the control panel the ACK control code sets the line spacing to 10 3 Ipi 7 72 inch The following example illustrates printing a single line of text at 8 Ipi CONTROL CODE ACK SELECTS 8 LPI LINE SPACING FOR ONE LINE ONLY THE DEFAULT LINE SPACING IS THEN RESELECTED AUTOMATICALLY 49 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Line Spacing 7 72 Inch ASCII Code SFCC 1 Hex Code SFCC 31 Dec Code SFCC 49 Purpose Specifies the line spacing at 7 72 inch 10 3 Ipi increments Comment When the 7 72 inch line spacing control code is received all lines are printed at the 7 72 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the
43. Serial Matrix IBM Proprinter III XL Epson FX 1050 e Page Orientations Portrait Inverted Portrait Landscape Inverted Landscape e Graphics Bit Image Graphics P Series Compatible Plot Mode e Vertical Page Formatting Printronix P Series Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU Serial Matrix Vertical Formatting Unit VFU e Character Sets IBM PC ECMA 94 Latin 1 Multinational DEC Multinational IBM Code Page 437 and 850 as well as the international symbol sets in the following categories Arabic Sets Cyrillic Sets European Sets Greek Sets Hebrew Sets Turkish Sets e Font Typefaces Courier Letter Gothic OCR A OCR B CG Triumverate Bold Condensed Ability to download True Type 18 Printer Configuration e Print Attributes Emphasized Bold print Scalable font sizes Superscript subscript print Automatic underline and overscore Carriage return editing Variable point size Italics e Barcode Printing NOTE Complete listings of all the choices from these categories are printed in the menu descriptions as well as in the description of the Super Set Character Set Selection SSCC R command see page 206 Printer Configuration Matching certain printer operational settings to those of the host computer is known as printer configuration The settings or configuration parameters are adjusted according to the printer function key descriptions in your printer User s Manual You can selec
44. Serial Matrix Emulation 114 Super Set Commands Epson FX 1050 Emulation 200 IBM Proprinter II XL Emulation 150 P Series Emulation 58 Serial Matrix Emulation 114 Super Set Programming Character set selection 206 Character set selection UTF8 209 Character spacing n 240 inch 209 commands 205 Font selection 209 Font size 211 Form length and width 212 335 Horizontal movements in printer resolution 214 Host form size 213 Line spacing n 288 inch 214 overview 205 Page orientation selection 215 PCX data 214 Print engine options 217 Printer protocol select 225 Software page eject 225 TrueType font selection 212 Supplies Department 323 T Tear Strip Time Print engine options 224 Telepen Bar Code 256 Top of Form IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 150 TrueType Font Selection Super Set Programming 212 U UCC EAN 128 application identifiers 259 Bar Code 258 Underline Epson FX 1050 Emulation 202 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 150 P Series Emulation 58 P Series XQ Emulation 74 Serial Matrix Emulation 114 Unidirectional Printing Set Reset Epson FX 1050 Emulation 202 Unidirectional Printing 1 Line Epson FX 1050 Emulation 202 Unidirectional Emulation 151 UPC Shipping Bar Code 268 UPC A Bar Code 263 UPC E Bar Code 265 UPS 11 Bar Code 269 User Defined Font Epson FX 1050 Emulation 195 Printing IBM Proprinter Ill XL 336 V Vertical Data Byte Pattern Sample
45. Service Numeric 26 Separator Gs 2 455 Secondary Message As per the UPS Manual To Barcoding 251 Chapter 7 Bar Codes MSI The MSI bar code structure is shown in Figure 17 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION 9 wee ee ee ee ee rm rm ee ee ee rm ze rm rm 1 UPPER GUARD BAND I 1 5 T i QUIET START DATA FIELD stop quiet ZONE CODE CODE zone HEIGHT Zea LOWER GUARD BAND J I I L OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 17 MSI Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Code Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning Both start and stop codes contain bars and spaces They are automatically produced Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent each numeric character The structure is four wide elements bars or spaces and four narrow elements Each character contains four data bits with each O bit made up of a narrow bar wide space arrangement and each 1 bit made up of a wide bar narrow space arrangement Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It
46. THE STANDARD COMPRESSED 17 1 CPI FOR ONE LINE ONLY 68 Delete Delete ASCII Code DEL Hex Code 7F Dec Code 127 Purpose Deleted character results in a blank space at the corresponding character position Comment The Delete code deletes the corresponding character in the print buffer As shown in Table 15 below the four delete control codes are used to delete DATE from the print line NOTE In order for this to work correctly the printer must be configured for carriage return only If configured for a carriage return and a line feed the contents of the buffer are printed on receipt of the CR code Table 15 Delete Example Enter in Print Buffer Printed Result INVOICE DATE CR INVOICE SSSSSSSSDDDD LF Key S Space hex 20 LF Line Feed hex OA CR Carriage Return hex OD D Delete hex 7F Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU ASCII Code DLE through US Hex Code 10 through 1F Dec Code 16 through 31 NOTE PI line is disabled in the above description ASCII and corresponding codes for EVFU functions differ when the PI line is enabled according to the printer interface being used Purpose Load and execute the EVFU Comment For detailed information see Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting 69 Chapter 3 Configuring the XQ Emulation with Control Codes Elongated Characters Double High Print ASCII Code BS SO Hex Code 08 OE Dec Code 8 14 NOTE Configure this f
47. The printer ignores this command 202 Vertical Tab Execute Vertical Tab Execute ASCII Code VT Hex Code 0B Dec Code 11 Purpose Advances the logical print head to the next vertical tab position Comment selected by ESC If no vertical channel was selected channel 0 is used If no vertical tabs were set the paper advances one line The logical print head moves to the left margin If a tab position is on the current line the paper is moved to the next tab position If there are no tab positions between the current line and the end of the form the paper is moved to the top of the next form This code cancels all one line only emphasis and font controls double wide from SO and ESC SO and unidirectional printing from ESC Vertical Tab Set Clear ASCII Code ESC B n1 n2 n3 nk NUL Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment 1B 42 n1 n2 n3 nk 00 27 66 n1 n2 n3 nk 0 Sets up to 16 vertical tab positions n 1 through 255 k 2 1 through 16 n1 through nk specify the line numbers for the vertical tab s up to a maximum of 16 tab positions NUL must end the sequence To clear the tab settings send ESC B NUL 1B 42 00 The values of n range from 1 through 255 hex 01 through FF and must be in ascending order The distance of each tab stop from TOF is the current line spacing times the number of lines given in n If the value of n exceeds the form length commands to move to that tab position a
48. are ignored Forms length is defined in inches therefore subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command Values of n greater than 24 are ignored When forms length is set by an ESC C NUL sequence the skip over perforation set by ESC N is cancelled This control code overrides forms length set at the operator panel Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in n 120 Inch ASCII Code ESC V 1 n2 Hex Code 1B5Cn1 n2 Dec Code 27 92 n1 n2 Purpose Moves the logical print head to a relative horizontal print position using 1 120 inch increments Comment Adds n1 256n2 120 inches to the horizontal position of the logical print head The number sent is two s complement with negative numbers moving to the left The command is ignored if it would move the logical print head beyond the page margins 198 Set Vertical Tabs in Channels Set Vertical Tabs in Channels ASCII Code ESC b c n1 n2 n3 nk NUL Hex Code 1B62cn1n2n3 nkOO Dec Code 2798cn1n2n3 nkO Purpose Assigns vertical tabs to channels selected by ESC see page 195 where c 0 through 7 n 0 through 255 n1 through nk specify the line number for the vertical tab s up to a maximum of 16 tab positions NUL must end the sequence Comment Channels are selected by ESC The distance of each tab stop from TOF is the current line spacing times the number of lines given in n If paper movement is commanded to a value of n greater
49. at the operator panel Table 41 shows the hex 80 9F printable characters for the Epson character set and for the IBM PC graphic character set 187 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Table 41 Epson Printable Codes Hex 80 9F B7 B6 BITS P5 B4 B3 B2 B1 OCTAL DECIMAL HEX B8 B7 B8 B7 B6 B6 BITS BITS B4 B3 B2 B1 B4 B3 B2 B1 8 0000 0000 000 1 000 1 0010 0010 001 1 001 1 0100 0100 010 1 010 1 0110 0110 011 1 011 1 1000 1000 100 1 100 1 1010 1010 101 1 101 1 1100 1100 ATO 1101 1110 1110 111 1 111 1 Epson USA Character Set IBM 437 Code Page 188 Master Print Select Master Print Select ASCII Code ESC n Hex Code 1B21n Dec Code 2733n Purpose Selects or changes print attributes in a single command where n an 8 bit number with the bits set to specify print attributes as shown in Table 42 Table 42 Master Print Select Bit Values Bit No Bit 0 Bit 1 0 10 cpi t 12 cpi 1 Monospaced 1 Proportional 2 Normal Condensed 3 Normal Emphasized 4 Normal t Double Strike 5 Normal Double Wide 6 Normal Italic 7 Normal Underlined Comment Emphasized is substituted for double strike Graphics and grey scale characters are not underlined Proportional spacing overrides condensed or 12 cpi printing if both are selected ESC n SELECTS MULTIPLE ATTRIBUTES WITH ONE COMMAND FOR EXAMPLE THIS SHOULD
50. blank space no character is printed Comment It is not necessary to pad the end of the print line with space characters The printer automatically fills the line after the line terminator is received The Space character code is also used to skip characters for editing and underlining as described on page 64 Underline ASCII Code Underline key _ Hex Code 5F Dec Code 95 Purpose Underlines specified character positions Comment To underline characters the print buffer is first loaded with the character line then the line must be terminated with a Carriage Return code Spaces are then loaded in the buffer at positions not to be underlined and the underline code inserted in the specific positions to be underlined Table 16 illustrates underlining Table 16 Underline Example Enter in Print Buffer Printed Result THE 600 PRINTER CR THE 600 PRINTER Ssss LF Key S Space hex 20 LF Line Feed hex 0A CR Carriage Return hex OD _ Underline hex 5F 74 Vertical Tab Vertical Tab ASCII Code VT Hex Code OB Dec Code 11 Purpose Acts as a line terminator when the EVFU is loaded causing the paper to advance to a specified preprogrammed line Comment Vertical Tab is primarily an EVFU line terminator code as described in Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting If the EVFU is not loaded and Vertical Tab control code is used a single line feed results 75 Chapter 3 Configurin
51. can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit If specified the modulo 10 or modulo 11 or both check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning 252 PDF 417 PDF 417 The PDF417 structure is shown in Figure 18 and described below SASSO p cote Mea ere e Sn T POSITION SA UPPER GUARD BAND to QUIET START DATA FIELD QUIET ZONE ZONE 1 1 I 1 1 L 1 TTi LOWER GUARD BAND Eege L e em mm rm em em mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm em mm mm mm vs Figure 18 PDF417 Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code Data Field PDF417 provides twelve modes to encode data The first three are pre established the remaining nine are user modes which can be defined by users or industry associations according to specific applications 1 Extended Alphanumeric Compaction mode EXC Comprised of four sub modes this mode offers encodation of all printable ASCII characters This is the default mode ASCII Emulation uses shift or latch characters to enable other mod
52. cannot be present on the same physical page When this command is sent to the emulation a form feed is enacted on the current physical page After the form feed is issued form length and form width revert to the default power up value Page orientation may also be selected from the control panel The following subsections describe portrait and landscape orientation 215 Chapter 7 TheSuper Set Commands Portrait Portrait refers to vertical page orientation where the height of a page is greater than its width The top edge of the image is parallel to the leading edge of the paper Figure 1 is an example of portrait orientation Leading Edge The top edge of the image is parallel to the leading edge of the paper 11 Inches lt 8 5 Inches gt Figure 1 Portrait Orientation Landscape Landscape refers to horizontal orientation where the width of the page is greater than its height The top edge of the image is the left edge of the paper The left edge of the image is the leading edge of the paper Figure 2 is an example of landscape orientation The top edge of the image is along the left edge Leading Wy of the paper Edge 8 5 Inches lt 11 Inches gt Figure 2 Landscape Orientation 216 Print Engine Options Print Engine Options The following commands enable the user to select print engine options through host software command NOTE Not all opti
53. cell is equal to the current line spacing and the width of a cell remains constant even with changes in the current character spacing The collection of all the glyphs for all fonts The location of a character in a font The location of a character is the same in all fonts A protocol instructing the printer how to construct a set of printable characters including symbols punctuation numbers diacritical markings and alphabet characters Each character is assigned a unique address in memory The degree of lightness and thickness of printed text For example Bold refers to a heavy or thick character weight Medium normal or book weight refer to the character weight used in this sentence A value between 0 and 256 that defines the location of a character within a character set Two or more bytes that instruct the printer to perform a special function The first character in the sequence is a Special Function Control Character SFCC which alerts the printer that the string is a command sequence See also SFCC A font attribute referring to a typeface with a smaller than normal character width but no change to character height characters per inch a measurement of monospaced fonts indicating the horizontal character density For example 10 cpi is 10 characters produced in a one inch horizontal space Decipoint Default Diagnostic Disable Emulation Enable Escape sequence Expanded False Famil
54. characters as shown in Table 71 on page 244 The start code or subset switch code determines whether a particular bar code character is decoded as one character or as a pair of numbers Readable Data The optional printed data field PDF provides a human readable interpretation of the bar code data When the printed data field is enabled by use of the PDF parameter the overall height of the bars is reduced to make room for a guard band and the human readable characters The printed data field will be formatted with spaces or parentheses denoting particular data fields such as the application identifier Special characters such as start stop subset switch modulo 103 check digit and FNC1 do not appear in the human readable data The readable data is oriented along the bar code from start code to stop code It may be positioned above or below a bar code UPC A Modulo 103 Check Digit A modulo 103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol immediately in front of the stop code in the same manner as the Code 128 bar code The check digit verifies accurate scanning The start code is included in the check digit algorithm The modulo 103 check digit is not displayed in the readable data field Modulo 10 Data Field Check Digit for SSCC 18 and SCC 14 Al 00 called the Serial Shipping Container Code or SSCC 18 takes 18 additional numerical data bytes The last data byte is a mod 10 check digit on th
55. control codes e The printer configuration menus You can modify a subset of the Serial Matrix emulation parameters using the control panel keys and LCD display as described in the User s Manual Control codes sent from a host system generally override previous settings that result from the configuration menus NOTE Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to the printer s NVRAM memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer or reset it to the factory default configuration The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the User s Manual To save the configuration using host control codes refer to Appendix B PID SETUP Option TI Chapter 78 4 Introduction Serial Matrix Default Values and States The factory settings for the Serial Matrix emulation menu options are shown in Table 17 Table 18 lists additional factory settings for parameters provided by the ASCII Emulation formatting menus The EMULATION menu options are described in the User s Manual Host control codes can override many of the settings for these menu options Table 17 Serial Matrix Default Settings Characteristic Default Setting Control Code 06 Define CR Code Auto LF Overstrike Define LF Code Printer Select Alternate Set 80 9F Character Sets Primary Subet Extended Subset 8 0 LPI CR CR Enable Enable LF LF Disable Control
56. double high print P Series control code BS hex 08 also selects elongated character printing for a single line When using this feature with relative line slewing the paper is moved n 1 lines rather than n lines See Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting beginning on page 285 for more information on relative line slewing When using small line spacing and the lines overlap an unexpected print format may result The following sample illustrates elongated character printing CONTROL CODE ESC h SELECTS ELONGATED CHARACTER PRINTING FOR ONE LINE ONLY 39 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Elongated Double High Print Set Reset ASCII Code SFCC wn Hex Code SFCC77n Dec Code SFCC 1197 Purpose Turns double high character printing on and off Double high characters are standard width but twice as high where n 1 or 49 hex 01 or hex 31 turns double high printing on n 0 or 48 hex 00 or hex 30 turns double high printing off Discussion The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in double high NOTE It is recommended to use double Line Feeds and Carriage Returns when double high character printing is on after an SFCC w control code has been sent or else the printer will overstrike text that has already printed If Superscript Subscript SFCC S is combined with Double High printing only Double High printing will occur Example The following sample illustrates double high chara
57. dpi Letter Gothic 4 34 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 5 35 x dpi y dpi OCR A 6 36 X dpi y dpi OCR B 7 87 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 8 38 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic The hex values shown e 0 and 30 are equal Either value can be used in your program expression The density dpi remains the same under this setting x and y represent the resolutions of the particular printer Table 25 Print Mode and Character Pitches ESC Xmn Characters Per Inch value of n value of m Print Mode DP NLQ HS HS HS OCR A OCR B NLG WNLQ2 0 30 1 31 2 32 3 33 4 34 5 35 6 36 7 37 8 38 0 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 31 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 2 32 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 3 33 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 4 34 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 5 35 20 17 20 20 20 17 17 The hex values shown i e O and 30 are equal Either value can be used in your program expression The value of m is represented by the font choice line 110 NOTE When using the Multinational character set in OCR A or OCR B print mode a unique character set is used Print Mode Pitch Selection Example The sample printout below shows a number of different print modes and pitch selections PRINT MODE AND OR PITCH SELECTION ESC Xmn SELECTS THE PRINT MODE CLETTER GOTHIC COURIER OR OCR AND CHARACTER PITCH IN CHARACTERS PER INCH CPI PRINTING IN GOTHIC FONT PRINTED IN GOTHIC 10 CPI PRINTED
58. ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code Each of the Code 128 subsets uses a unique start code and a common stop code both automatically provided by the ASCII Emulation Code 128A Data Field Subset A operates in the manual mode only Subset A data characters include mostly normal printable ASCII characters which require no subset switching and can be entered directly Code 128B Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent an extensive character set 96 ASCII characters and seven control characters The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules Code 128C Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent 100 pairs of numeric digits 00 through 99 and 3 control characters The bars and spaces vary in width from 1 through 4 modules Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules 240 Code 128 Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretat
59. following example illustrates n 216 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC J 200 PERFORMS A 200 216 INCH LINE FEED FUNCTION FOR ONE LINE ONLY 183 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi ASCII Code ESC 2 Hex Code 1B32 Dec Code 2750 Purpose Sets the line spacing to 1 6 inch 6 Ipi for subsequent line feeds Comment The 2 is ASCII character 2 not hex 2 When ESC 2 is received all lines are printed at 6 Ipi until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset This control code overrides line spacing set at the operator panel Example The following example illustrates 1 6 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC 2 SETS LINE SPACING AT 6 LPI FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi ASCII Code ESC 0 Hex Code 1B 30 Dec Code 2748 Purpose Sets the line spacing to 1 8 inch 8 Ipi for subsequent line feeds Comment When ESC O is received all lines are printed at 8 Ipi until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset This control code overrides line spacing set at the operator panel Example The following example illustrates 1 8 inch line spacing CONIROL CODE ESC O SETS LINE SPACING AT 1 8 8 LPI INCH FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED 184 Line Spacing 7 72 Inch Line Spacing 7 72 Inch ASCII Code ESC 1 Hex Code 1B31 Dec Code 27
60. line preceded by an additional line terminator code Text characters terminator or LF code Characters may extend into the range of the are printed at full height previously printed plot line and appear truncated Figure 36 Truncated Character Line Combining Graphics and Text The ASCII Emulation is capable of combining graphics and characters text on the same page in two ways e Use Bit Image graphics or P Series Plot mode to produce characters as well as graphics e A combination of text not plot and graphics can be mixed on the same page within all protocols Text and graphics can be mixed on the same line however only by using the Bit Image graphics in the Epson Serial Matrix or Proprinter XL protocols Any character or symbol can be created in the Plot mode or with Bit Image graphics simply by addressing and plotting the appropriate dot positions Either Bit Image or Plot mode graphics can be mixed with text within the page on a line by line basis Each line of graphics data must include a graphics control code or the emulation automatically defaults to the print mode Using Bit Image graphics it is possible to use the print mode to produce text on one print pass followed by a print pass to produce graphics on the same line however text characters can be affected by the Bit Image data when combined on the same line 283 Chapter 8 Combining Graphics and Text 284 9 Vertical Page Formatting Introduct
61. look like the sample below TTT Bell ASCII Code BEL Hex Code 07 Dec Code 7 Purpose Sounds the printer s buzzer beeper Comment The BEL function sounds the buzzer beeper for 0 2 seconds upon receipt of this command 28 Bold Print Bold Print ASCII Code SFCC G SFCCj Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example SFCC 47 SFCC 6A SFCC 71 SFCC 106 Selects bold character printing When the bold character printing control code is received all characters are printed in bold until reset by the bold print reset control code or printer reset Bold Print is the same as printing double strike on an impact printer When SFCC j is used bold printing is selected for one line only and reset by the bold print reset control code Emulation reset or a paper motion command The following sample illustrates bold character printing CONTROL CODE ESC G SELECTS BOLD CHARACTER PRINTING FOR EXAMPLE AaBbCcDdEeFfGgHhI iJ jKkL 1MmNnOoPp CONTROL CODE ESC H CANCELS BOLD CHARACTER PRINTING Bold Print Reset ASCII Code SFCC H Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example SFCC 48 SFCC 72 Resets bold character printing The bold print reset control code only resets the bold print character attribute Other print attributes such as double wide printing are not affected See the Bold Print control code above for a sample of bold character print set and reset 29 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation
62. mode information 53 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Print Mode Pitch Selection ASCII Code SFCC X mnSFCC n qSFCC PMODE n Hex Code SFCC 58 mnSFCC 5B n 71 Dec Code SFCC 88 mnSFCC 91 n 113 Purpose Selects the print mode Letter Gothic Courier or OCR and character pitch in characters per inch cpi where In SFCC PMODE n n ranges from 0 through 6 to select the print mode pitch combinations available from Table 9 All other values result in an error message Command Line Error Messages are listed in Table 2 on page 25 where In SFCC X mn m Print Mode code n Pitch cpi An asterisk hex 2A may be substituted for m or n Whenever the asterisk replaces m or n its current value does not change Values other than those shown in Table 11 and Table 12 are ignored where In SFCC nq n Print Mode Pitch code values other than those shown in Table 10 are ignored q Command sequence terminator NOTE The print mode must be changed before the first printable symbol of a print line or the command sequence is deferred until the next line Comment P Series PMODE switches to the Primary Character Set and selects print mode and pitch Print mode and pitch can also be selected from the control panel The print mode pitch select control code from the host computer overrides the control panel print mode setting and the print mode and pitch selection are reflected on the message dis
63. over perforation and character pitch are reset to their power up configuration values Character by character and line by line attributes are canceled The vertical format unit is cleared The current line is set to the top of form position Interface parameters and printer protocol selection are not affected Expanded Double Wide Print ASCII Code SFCC W n Hex Code SFCC57n Dec Code SFCC87n Purpose Selects or resets expanded double wide print where n 1 selects expanded print hex 01 or hex 31 n 0 resets expanded print hex 00 or hex 30 Comment When expanded print using SFCC W is received all characters are printed double wide until reset by the expanded print reset control code or printer reset Example The following sample illustrates expanded character printing and expanded character printing reset CONTROL CODE ESC W 1 SELECTS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE ESC W O RESETS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING 42 Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only ASCII Code SFCC k Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example CONTROL CODE k SELECTS SFCC 6B SFCC 107 Selects expanded double wide print for one line only This expanded print control code is a line by line print attribute When the SFCC k control code is received the current line is printed double wide and then automatically reset This control code can be reset by a paper m
64. page 123 Caution should be used when combining Superscript or Subscript printing with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High or small line spacing overlapping lines may occur Characters with different horizontal or vertical dot densities do not overlap The following sample illustrates superscript subscript printing CONTROL CODE ESC S O SELECTSSUPERSCRIPT A2 B2 C2 CONTROL CODE ESC S 1 SELECTSsusscrrpt 3lugx749pec CONTROL CODE ESC T CANCELS SUPERSCRIPT SUBSCRIPT PRINTING Superscript Subscript Printing Reset ASCII Code ESC T Hex Code Dec Code Purpose 1B 54 27 84 Resets superscript and subscript printing as set by ESC S 149 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Super Set Commands ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B7C 7D 3B Dec Code 27 124 125 59 Purpose Control code sequence used to introduce the super set commands Comment Super set commands affect the ASCII Emulation as a whole regardless of the printer protocol currently active The commands are sent from the host in the data stream to the printer and provide the following capabilities e Select a printer protocol e Change the page orientation e Define various font attributes including typeface and point size e Select proportional fonts See Chapter 7 Super Set Programming for further information on the Super Set commands Top of Form ASCII Code ESC 4 Hex Code 1B 34 Dec
65. print cancel 126 Bold print set 126 Bottom margin 127 Bottom margin cancel 127 Cancel 128 Carriage return 128 Carriage return set 129 Character pitch 12 cpi 129 330 Characters 80 9F Control codes 129 Characters 80 9F Printable symbols 129 Condensed print 130 Condensed print reset 130 Control code index 121 Control codes 120 default settings 118 Deselect printer 131 Emphasized print 131 Emphasized print reset 131 Escape control code header 120 Expanded print 132 Expanded print reset 1 line 133 Expanded print one line only 133 Form feed 134 Forms length set inches 134 Forms length set lines 135 Horizontal tab 135 Horizontal tab set reset 136 Horizontal vertical tabs clear 136 Initialize parameters 137 Line feed 139 Line feed n 216 inch 140 Line spacing n 216 inch 144 Line spacing n 72 inch 143 Line spacing 1 6 inch 141 Line spacing 1 8 inch 141 Line spacing 7 72 inch 142 Margins left right 144 Overscoring 145 overview 117 Print control codes 145 Print one control code 145 Reset code 120 Select attributes 146 Select font 148 Select proportional spacing 148 Superscript subscript printing 149 Superscript subscript printing reset 149 Super set commands 150 Top of Form 150 Underline 150 Unidirectional printing 151 Vertical tab 151 Vertical tab set clear 152 Image Width Print engine options 218 Initialize Parameters IBM Proprinter I
66. processed by the base emulation The CTHI emulation will not process PTR_SETUP commands Since there is no disk on a flash based printer DISK IO commands are now called FILE IO However for backwards compatibility DISK IO and FILE IO are synonymous The PTR SETUP command set is case sensitive all PTR SETUP commands are in upper case characters only The white space separating commands may be any number of spaces and tabs This allows a PTR SETUP file to be formatted for easier readability Any unknown command will terminate the PTR SETUP processing The offending command will be the first line of printed text Although the original implementation of PTR SETUP allowed for only a single parameter separated from the sub command by a single semicolon character the new PTR SETUP command set allows for multiple parameters separated by commas semicolons spaces or tabs 297 Appendix B The PTR SETUP Commands Commands Each emulation has modes in which the PIR SETUP commands could get missed For this reason it is highly recommended that all PTR SETUP commands be placed between print jobs rather than attempting to imbed them within jobs PTR SETUP commands have the following format SFCC PTR SETUP Command Sub Command Value PTR END For example if the SFCC assigned to the emulation you are using is the caret hex 5E and you wanted to load configuration number 4 and capture all incoming data to a file named
67. select the P Series XQ emulation mode as the active printer emulation select ASCII Emulation from the EMULATION menu and P Series XQ from the Printer Protocol menu as described in the User s Manual The P Series XQ emulation provides many configurable parameters The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 13 You can modify the emulation parameter values in two ways e The P Series XQ host control codes An extensive set of P Series XQ control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the P Series XQ control codes e The printer configuration menus You can modify a subset of the P Series XQ emulation parameters using the control panel keys and LCD as described in the User s Manual Control codes sent from a host system generally override previous settings that result from the configuration menus NOTE Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to the printer s NVRAM memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the User s Manual To save the configuration using host control codes refer to Appendix B PTR SETUP Option 61 Chapter 62 3 Introduction The emulation s response to several of the control codes depends on the configuration For example upon receipt o
68. stop codes permit bidirectional scanning Both start and stop codes contain bars and spaces They are automatically produced Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent numeric characters The structure is 2 wide elements bars or spaces and 3 narrow elements In the bar code two characters are interleaved paired bars are used to represent the first character in the pair and spaces are used to represent the second character in the pair While Interleaved 2 5 has a variable data field German I 2 5 is restricted to 11 or 13 digits Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning German I 2 5 bar codes have the check digit inserted automatically 249 Chapter 7 Bar Codes Maxicode The Maxicode bar code structure is shown in Figure 16 and described below Figure 16 Sample MAXICODE Bar Code The Maxicode bar code is a fixed size matrix symbology made up of an offset of rows of hexagonal elements arranged around a unique finder pattern Maxicode is suitable for high speed scanning applications and is capable of encoding all of the 256 ASCII characters Readable Data The Maxicode bar code does not support a human readable form Data Field The data field of a
69. than the page length the paper movement command is ignored The values of n must be in ascending order If they are not the sequence up to and including the out of sequence number is ignored The rest of the load is processed Skip over perforation is ignored You can clear any channel by sending ESC b c NUL where c is the channel number Skip Over Perforation ASCII Code ESC N n Hex Code 1B4En Dec Code 2778n Purpose Selects the number of lines at the current line spacing for the paper to skip at the bottom of the page where n 1 through 127 hex 01 through 7F Comment nis the number of lines skipped between the last line printed on one page and the first line on the next page The actual distance set is the product of n and the current line spacing If the value of n exceeds the current form length the skip is set to one line smaller than the form length or to 0 whichever is greater Skip over perforation set by this command overrides operator panel settings This feature is canceled by ESC O ESC C ESC C0 199 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Skip Over Perforation Cancel ASCII Code ESC O Hex Code 1B4F Dec Code 2779 Purpose Cancels the skip over perforation set by ESC N and resets the bottom margin to zero Comment O is ASCII uppercase o not zero 0 Super Set Commands ASCII Code ESC I Hex Code 1B 7C 7D 3B Dec Code 27 124 125 59 Purpose Control code seq
70. that Prop matches the saved file properties Any mismatch will cause the command to be ignored For backwards compatibility MINSIZE Kb For backwards compatibility FONT FontName Downloads an HP LaserJet font and saves it as FontName IFONT FontName Downloads a scaleable AGFA type font and saves it as FontName 300 Command Commands Table 81 PTR SETUP Commands continued Sub Command Parameter Description ENGINE ALM WIDE wide width Set the Auto Label Mapping wide width in units of 1 1000 e g a wide width value of 1000 1 which represents the width of the image in the file sent from the host which is to be auto label mapped into several labels each of which will have a width of narrow width of labels wide width narrow width rounded down ALM_NARROW ALM_ENABLE narrow width N W Set the Auto Label Mapping narrow width which represents the width of one auto mapped label in units of 1 1000 e g a narrow width value of 1000 1 This width should be Set prior to the wide width In addition it can never exceed the physical width of the printer If it does the narrow width will be automatically reduced to the Page Width value set in the configuration menu Set Auto Label Mapping to Narrow Wide or Off Enter N for Narrow W for Wide or any other letter to disable ALM By default only the Narro
71. the data stream to the printer and provide the following capabilities e Select a printer protocol e Change the page orientation e Define various font attributes including typeface and point size e Select proportional fonts See Chapter 7 Super Set Programming beginning on page 205 for further information on the Super set commands Underline ASCII Code SFCC n Hex Code SFCC2Dn Dec Code SFCC 45n Purpose Enables or disables automatic underlining of all characters where n 0 to disable automatic underlining hex 00 or hex 30 n 1 to enable automatic underlining hex 01 or hex 31 Comment When automatic underline is enabled all characters including spaces are underlined until disabled Example The following sample illustrates automatic underlining CONTROL CODE ESC 1 ENABLES AUTOMATIC UNDERLINING CONTROL CODE ESC O DISABLES AUTOMATIC UNDERLINING 58 VFU Commands P Series VFU Commands P Series ASCII Code See the P Series EVFU section in Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting for codes NOTE If the SFCC being used is ESC the PI line must be set high when using the EVFU Purpose Load and execute the VFU Comment See Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting beginning on page 285 for detailed information Vertical Tab ASCII Code VT Hex Code OB Dec Code 11 Purpose Prints the data in the buffer and advances the paper to the next vertical tab position Comment If a vert
72. to invoke and configure numerous Epson emulation functions Format for Control Code Descriptions The following information is listed for each code function where applicable ASCII Code The standard ASCII name for the control code Hex Code The control code numeric equivalent in hexadecimal Dec Code The control code numeric equivalent in decimal Purpose The function s of the control code Comment Any exceptions or limitations to use of the control code Example Where applicable we present a sample using the control code along with the result of running the program t dagger This symbol means the code produces non Epson behavior in your printer If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that are defined in the control code description unpredictable results may occur Escape Sequences An Epson control code consisting of more than one character is called an escape sequence because the first character in the sequence is always the ASCII ESCape character ESC alerts the printer that a special function command not printable characters follows The format for an Epson escape sequence is ESC parameter 1 parameter 2 parameter n For example to select emphasized offset print send the ESC character immediately followed by the E character do not add a space character ASCII ESC E Hex 1B 45 Dec 27 69 Set and Reset Codes Set and Reset Codes Set and reset are another way
73. to the current cursor position You cannot specify the upper left corner to be above the current print position If xxxx 0000 and yyyy 0000 and there are no line feeds any text following the bar code command prints next to the bar code Notice that the x horizontal cursor position is automatically updated See Figure 3 New Cursor Original Position Cursor Position nnmmamngecnodne 7 1 523456754321 Figure 3 Bar Code Example 1 However if the values are other than 0000 the original cursor position remains intact despite the printing of the bar code See Figure 4 which shows xxxx 10 and yyyy 5 Orignal e E TEXT 5 2 1 123456 54321 Figure 4 Bar Code Example 2 230 Bar Code Format To place the text below the bar code you must insert line feed commands See Figure 5 Original Cursor Position esos ss esSscs neon sss i 5 10 Line Feeds 1 52345654321 8 TEXT Figure 5 Bar Code Example 3 231 Chapter 7 Bar Codes Australian 4 State The Australian 4 State structure is shown in Figure 6 and described below I GUARD BAND r g I I QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET Normal isea vum EES et d OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD START POSITION e wee ee rm ee ee ee ee ee eee rm zm em rm 1 T Figure 6 Australian 4 State Structure The Australian 4 State bar code supports the Australian Postal Service Australian 4 State bar codes are si
74. valid line terminators are Form Feed FF Line Feed LF and Carriage Return CR however when used in the Command Line these line terminators do not cause any paper motion If a Command Line contains an error the command is not executed and the line truncates to include any of the error messages listed in the following table Table 2 Command Line Error Messages Error Message Explanation Invalid Parameter The command received cannot be interpreted correctly or the correct command is not followed by an expected delimiter Parameter Out of Bounds A decimal parameter in the command is out of range Missing Parameter One or more necessary parameters is missing from the command Illegal Character in Decimal A decimal parameter contains a non numeric Parameter character or a fractional digit is out of range Too Many Digits in Decimal A decimal parameter contains too many Parameter digits 25 Chapter 26 2 Attribute Set and Reset Codes Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Control Code Reference Index Certain print attributes are set and reset turned on or off by using the appropriate SFCC code sequence and the numbers 1 or 0 These may be either the hexadecimal code 01 and 00 or the ASCII code for the printable symbols of decimal 1 and 0 hexadecimal code 31 and 30 respectively Expanded Print Superscript Subscript Print and Underline are attributes that a
75. with Control Codes Carriage Return ASCII Code CR Hex Code OD Dec Code 13 Purpose Returns the logical print head to the first character column resets the pointer to the first character position Comment The CR code may or may not cause printing or paper motion depending on the DEFINE CR CODE configuration parameter value If the DEFINE CR CODE submenu displays Define CR Code CR CR the characters following the CR are printed over the previous characters on the line If the DEFINE CR CODE submenu displays Define CR Code CR CR LF control code CR is converted to perform a carriage return and line feed function 30 Character Set Select Character Set Select ASCII Code SFCC xyz lowercase L Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where SFCC 6C xyz SFCC 108 xyz Selects the character set extended character set and the international language for a specific character set X is the character set Table 3 y is the international language for the selected character set Table 4 zis the extended character set for the selected character set Table 5 Table 3 Character Set Select x x Character Set 0 hex 30 IBM PC 1 hex 31 Multinational 2 hex 32 ECMA Latin 1 3 hex 33 DEC Multinational Table 4 International Language Select y x 0 hex 30 X 1 hex 31 X 2 hex 32 x 3 hex 33 S IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Mult
76. 001 through 999 DPI m selects the vertical DPI range 001 through 999 DPI This command has the same effect as changing the densities in the Horizontal DPI and Vertical DPI parameters under the Plot Attributes menu on the front panel See your User s Manual for details 221 Chapter 7 IMPORTANT 222 The Super Set Commands Power Saver Time ASCII Code SSCC y n Hex Code SSCC 79 n Dec Code SSCC 121 n Purpose Sets the power saver time in seconds Refer to Table 58 for valid values Table 58 Power Saver Time n Value ASCII Power Saver Time 0060 1 minute 0300 5 minutes 0600 10 minutes 0900 15 minutes 1800 30 minutes 2700 45 minutes 3600 1 hour 9999 4 hours Print Count ASCII Code SSCC on Hex Code SSCC6Fn Dec Code SSCC 111n where n the number of times to print a page ranging from 0001 through 9999 Print Intensity ASCII Code SSCC i n Hex Code SSCC692Bn Dec Code SSCC 105 43n where n print intensity ranging from 0000 through 0020 If a value for n is 0021 or greater 0020 is selected For thermal printers In a single print job if you send multiple data to print with different print intensities the entire data prints using the last print intensity command Print Engine Options Print Mode ASCII Code SSCC n Hex Code SSCC21n Dec Code SSCC33n Table 59 Print Mode n Value ASCII Meaning 0 Selects thermal transfer mode 1 Selects direct therm
77. 1 022_ 023_ 024_ 025 026_ 027_ 028 O29 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 o T D e wh du LH A D D amp R 4 H x DM Ka w nr O amp t wm r E n iv oF L D lt wo l ET Fe R pe e D o D c i 6 789 tra lo mv o p hf zs SD c SS 2 8 or 6 859 s T 07 7 x 1 v n T V y v E P Q v C E 2 e y e A e 8 ai h A W k B9 9 dos X Id td ii td Address Table in Decimal 041 042_ 043_ 044_ 045_ 046 047 048 049_ 050 051 052 093 054 055 056 057 058 059 060_ et 34 n io HI in x 56789 MoI w E lIl Moo Ml unu nud NP o BE Rm OI 8 C D Lon ON vow x Es az DN Bou n re e 0 t 061 062 Q 3 064 045 056 D 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 H 307 Appendix C 308 Address Table in Decimal 081 SEHR 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 0 1 23 45 6 7 8 9 8 9 8 k 4 H t i t Y Hi ol Ce zm of bat ws Cc y c5 kal e Eri gt b K VE r ie fbi en ES gt I ad e Ci je Di H Address Table in Decimal i2i_ 122_ 123 124 125 0 7 1 x 2 DN d 3 ce ba
78. 2 700 256 2 n1 700 2x256 700 512 188 The program statement is ESC K 188 2 DATA Print 180 data bytes single density n2 180 256 0 n1 180 0x256 180 0 180 The program statement is ESC K 180 0 DATA Bit Image Programming Format The number of data bytes and the n1 n2 definition must be equal If too few data bytes are sent printing does not begin until sufficient data is received Any characters following n1 and n2 are interpreted and plotted as data until the n1 n2 definition is satisfied If excess data is received only the defined amount is plotted Excess data is interpreted as printable characters or control codes The maximum number of data bytes when using 132 column paper that can be included in the DATA portion of the program statement varies according to the operating mode At 60 dpi single density 792 bytes double density 2 1584 bytes quadruple density 2 3168 bytes Note that bit image data printed in Letter Gothic DP with the paper set to advance less than 1 6 inch causes data on successive lines to overlap A detailed description of the individual Bit Image control codes with examples is provided in the appropriate protocol chapter The following sample program written in BASIC produces Single Density Bit Image graphics of the pattern shown below The 7 data bit pattern is repeated 40 times The printed result of running the program is shown in Figure 30 10 LPRINT Sing
79. 40 inch horizontal spacing until a new character spacing is selected Example SSCCI 008 specifies a spacing of 30 characters per inch Font Selection ASCII Code SSCCF n1 n2 n3 n4 n5 Hex Code SSCC 46 n1 3B n2 3B n3 3B n4 3B n5 Dec Code SSCC 70 n1 59 n259 n359 n4 59 n5 Purpose Selects fixed pitch and proportional font attributes with character size specified in terms of typographic points Comment Parameters n1 through n5 are specified as ASCII digit values If a non digit is used in any parameter the value remains unchanged The following paragraphs explain how to set various options using ASCII digit values for each parameter where Parameter n1 identifies a specific typeface Enter the five digit number representing the selected typeface Fixed pitch spacing is used for the Letter Gothic DP Courier NLQ OCR A and OCR B typefaces All others use proportional spacing The standard fonts available are Courier 93950 Letter Gothic 93777 OCR A 90993 OCR B 91409 and CG Times 92500 Parameter n2 is a 1 digit bold flag n2 0 disable bold 1 enable bold 209 Chapter 7 TheSuper Set Commands Parameter n3 selects a 1 digit slant flag Slant is similar to italic but also offers a backward slant n3 0 disable slant 1 right slant 2 left slant Parameter n4 selects a 3 digit symbol set Table 48 n4 Value Symbol Sets Printer Protocol n4 Symbol Set Proprinter XL
80. 415 44 62 3 0 3 8 30 NOTE For an INFOn value of 3 the digits 0 through 3 represent the following bars O Full Height 1 Ascender 2 Descender 3 Tracker Since this is a proprietary encoding the Customer Data is not included in the optional readable data field 233 Chapter 234 7 Bar Codes FCCn amp customer information INFOn comprises of the first three digits of the data field as shown in the following example Note that the length of the data field is FCCn two digits INFOn one digit data i e data 3 ESCI CH 0 0008 0009 020 62100141544adcogre117 PA H08 D XXXX 8 yy 9 gt 62 00141544 adcOSrell7 09 44 18 46 aff PP Pm ell Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol The readable field prints left aligned below the bar code structure Codabar The Codabar structure is shown in Figure 7 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC rA POSITION amp e ror 1 l UPPER GUARD BAND I pes ux I QUIET START DATA FIELD stop quiet L l l LOWER GUARD BAND L 4J OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 7 Codabar Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading
81. 49 Purpose Sets the line spacing to 7 72 inch 10 3 Ipi for subsequent line feeds Comment All lines are printed at the 7 72 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset This control code overrides line spacing set at the operator panel Example The following example illustrates 7 72 inch line spacing Gt ENEE ccc Line Spacing n 72 Inch ASCII Code ESC An Hex Code 1B41n Dec Code 2765n Purpose Sets a line spacing of n 72 inch for subsequent line feeds where n 0 through 255 Comment When this control sequence is received all subsequent line feeds are n 72 inch until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset This setting overrides line spacing set at the operator panel Small values of n may result in overlapping lines Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript characters are used on the same line Any values set by ESC 3 line spacing n 216 inch are replaced Example The following example illustrates 20 72 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC A 20 SETS LINE SPACING AT 20 72 INCH INCREMENTS FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER LINE SPACING IS SELECTED 185 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Line Spacing n 216 Inch ASCII Code ESC 3 n Hex Code 1B33n Dec Code 2751n Purpose Specifies the line spacing at n 216 inch increments where n 0 t
82. 5 any odd value automatic overscoring is enabled if n 0 2 4 any even value automatic overscoring is disabled Comment When automatic overscore is enabled all characters including spaces are overscored Full height graphics characters are not overscored Example The following sample illustrates automatic overscoring and overscoring reset CONTROL CODE ESC 1 CONTROL CODE ESC O DISABLES AUTOMATIC OVERSCORING Print Control Codes ASCII Code ESC V n1 n2 Hex Code 1B5C n1 n2 Dec Code 27 92 n1 n2 Purpose Prints the characters assigned to specified hex codes as characters rather than interpreting the code values as command parameters or control codes where n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow each byte represents one hex code Print One Control Code ASCII Code ESC n Hex Code 1B5En Dec Code 2794n Purpose Prints the character corresponding to n where n hex code of the character 145 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Select Attributes ASCII Code ESC n1 NUL NUL NUL n2 n3 Hex Code 1B5B 40 n1 00 00 00 n2 n3 Dec Code 279164n1000n2n3 Purpose Selects double height and double width attributes as well as either single or double height line spacing where n1 can take on the following characteristics Table 31 Select Attributes n1 Values n1 Hex Function 03 Set character height and line feed settings according to the v
83. 5 Purpose Sets the printer s initial condition Discussion This command causes the printer to reset and defines the configuration that will be loaded to the printer during the reset Several variables must be specified to define the load configuration as described below NOTE An ESC K code can occur at any place in the datastream and is acted upon immediately All numerical parameters are in the hex 00 through FF range unless stated otherwise Only specified parameters are supported Other values may be ignored or cause unpredictable results and should be avoided ni The value of n1 defines which of the following n bytes will be included in the command line as shown in Table 28 Table 28 n1 Values n1 Hex Value Function 1 One byte follows n2 3 Three bytes follow n2 n3 and n4 4 Four bytes follow n2 n3 n4 and n5 NOTE Specifying any value for n1 other than 1 3 or 4 may cause unpredictable results and should be avoided n2 The 2 digit hexadecimal value for n2 defines the load configuration for the printer The Proprinter III XL supports six values for this parameter 00 01 04 05 254 and 255 hex 00 01 04 05 FE and FF Any other value will be ignored If any of the six supported values is entered for the n2 parameter then the printer will reset to the factory default configuration Configuration parameters defined by command bytes n4 and n5 if present will override conflicting factory de
84. 5n Purpose Stores a line spacing of n 72 inch increments where n 1 through 85 all others are ignored Comment When the ESC A control sequence is received all line feed commands following an ESC 2 sequence are at n 72 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting Small values of n may result in overlapping lines Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript characters are used on the same line Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap 106 Example Line Spacing n 216 Inch The following example illustrates 20 72 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC A 20 SETS LINE SPACING AT 20 72 INCH INCREMENTS FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED Line Spacing n 216 Inch ASCII Code ESC 3 n Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example 1B 33n 2751n Specifies the line spacing at n 216 inch increments n 1 through 255 When the n 216 inch line spacing control code is received all line feeds following are at n 216 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing
85. 80 Escape Sequences Epson FX 1050 Emulation 158 Even Dot Plot P Series Emulation 53 P Series XQ Emulation 72 Exceptions Epson FX 1050 Emulation 156 Executing vertical tabs Serial Matrix VFU 293 Exit P Series plot mode Graphics 283 Expanded Print IBM Proprinter Ill XL Emulation 132 P Series Emulation 42 Serial Matrix Emulation 98 Expanded Print Reset 1 Line IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 133 Expanded Print One Line Only IBM Proprinter Ill XL Emulation 133 P Series Emulation 43 Serial Matrix Emulation 98 Extended Character Set P Series Emulation 43 Serial Matrix Emulation 99 Extended Character Set Cancel P Series Emulation 44 Serial Matrix Emulation 100 F Features software 18 FILE IO command PTR_Setup 303 FIM Bar Code 247 Font Selection Super Set Programming 209 Font Size Super Set Programming 211 Form Feed Epson FX 1050 Emulation 177 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 134 P Series Emulation 45 P Series XQ Emulation 70 Serial Matrix Emulation 100 Form Length and Width Super Set Programming 212 Form Margins Set P Series Emulation 46 Serial Matrix Emulation 102 Forms Length Set Inches IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 134 P Series Emulation 45 Serial Matrix Emulation 100 Forms Length Set Lines IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 135 P Series Emulation 46 Serial Matrix Emulation 101 G Glossary 17 Graphics Bit image 272 Bit image density 275 Bit image pa
86. A 20 SETS LINE SPACING AT 20 72 INCH INCREMENTS FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED 51 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Line Spacing n 216 Inch ASCII Code SFCC 3 n Hex Code SFCC 33n Dec Code SFCC 51n Purpose Specifies the line spacing at n 216 inch increments where n 1 through 255 hex 01 through hex FF Comment When the n 216 inch line spacing control code is received all line feeds following are at n 216 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing the remainder is added to the next paper motion command Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript overlapping lines may occur Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap Example The following example illustrates n 216 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC 3 50 SETS LINE SPACING AT 50 216 INCH INCREMENTS FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED Overscoring ASCII Code SFCC o Hex Code SFCC5Fn Dec Code SFCC 95n Purpose Enables or disables automatic over
87. ASCII Code CAN Hex Code 18 Dec Code 24 Purpose Clears all unprinted data from a line but does not affect control codes Comment You can use this control code to delete a line but do so with caution to avoid possible misprinting This control code cancels the double wide attribute set by SO No other print attributes are affected The logical print head goes to the print position it had after the last CR or paper motion command Carriage Return ASCII Code CR Hex Code OD Dec Code 13 Purpose Prints the data in the buffer then returns the logical print head to the left margin Comment Subsequent data are emphasized A line feed is appended if the printer is configured from the operator panel for CR CR LF When CR CR LF this code cancels all one line only emphasis and font controls double wide from SO and ESC SO and unidirectional printing from ESC lt Character Pitch 10 cpi ASCII Code ESC P Hex Code 1B 50 Dec Code 27 80 Purpose Sets character pitch to 10 characters per inch cpi Comment This command is normally used to cancel 12 cpi Character Pitch 12 cpi ASCII Code ESC M Hex Code 1B 4D Dec Code 2777 Purpose Sets character pitch to 12 characters per inch cpi Comment This command is available in all print modes except OCR A and OCR B 165 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Character Pitch 15 cpi ASCII Code ESC g Hex Code 1B67 Dec Code
88. BE 12 CPI ITALIC DOUBLE WIDE UNDERLINED PRINT 189 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Paper Out Detection Enable ASCII Code ESC 9 Hex Code 1B 39 Dec Code 2757 Purpose Asserts a paper out condition immediately when the end of the paper supply is sensed TComment The printer decodes and ignores this command Paper Out Detection Disable ASCII Code ESC 8 Hex Code 1B38 Dec Code 2756 Purpose Enable printing to the end of the paper supply when a paper out condition is sensed TComment The printer decodes and ignores this command Pass Bit 7 from Host ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B 23 Dec Code 2735 Purpose Passes bit 7 the eighth and most significant bit whether it is 1 or 0 thereby cancelling ESC gt and ESC Comment This command affects only text and control code data bit 8 of graphics data is always passed through 190 Printer Deselect Printer Deselect ASCII Code DC3 Hex Code 13 Dec Code 19 Purpose Places printer in the deselected state Comment The configuration parameter Printer Select must be set to Enable Refer to the User s Manual for information about this menu option When the printer receives this command it ignores data until a DC1 Printer Select command is received Printer Select ASCII Code DC1 Hex Code 11 Dec Code 17 Purpose Places printer in the selected state Comment The configuration parameter Printer Sel
89. CC 85 Purpose Takes the printer off line Paper Cut ASCII Code SSCCt n Hex Code SSCC74n Dec Code SSCC 116 n Table 56 Paper Cut n Value ASCII Meaning 0 Disable cut after printing the page 1 Enable cut after printing the page Paper Feed Shift ASCII Code SSCC E n Hex Code SSCC 45 2D n Dec Code SSCC 69 45 n Purpose Distance in 1 100 inch to advance positive value or pull back negative value the stop position of the media when the Tear Off Strip Tear Off Peel Off or Cut media handling option is enabled The brackets around the symbol indicate it is optional do not use these brackets in the command where means pull back the media No means advance the media n hundredths of inches to move the media to the media handling position The minimum value is 050 1 2 inch The maximum value is the lesser of the form length or 999 9 99 inches All other values are ignored 220 Paper Length ASCII Code SSCC p n1 n2 Hex Code SSCC 70 n1 3B n2 Dec Code SSCC 112 n159 n2 where n2 paper length four ASCII digits Print Engine Options Table 57 Paper Length n1 Value ASCII Units of n2 0 Current CPI 1 Inches 2 Centimeters Plot Attributes ASCII Code SSCCV n m Hex Code SSCC 56 n3B m Dec Code SSCC86n59 m Purpose Selects plot attributes in horizontal or vertical dots per inch DPI where nselects the horizontal DPI range
90. CII CODE ESC bn ESC C NUL n ESC Cn HT ESC D n1 n2 nk NUL ESC2 ESC 0 ESC 1 ESCAn ESC 3n ESC X n1 n2 ESC Pn ESC 4 ESC B n1 n2 nk NUL ESC G ESC H SI DC2 ESC ESC E ESC F ESC Wn SO Expanded Double Wide Print Reset One Line Only Overscoring DC4 ESC n PAGE 134 139 140 151 123 127 127 128 128 129 134 135 135 136 141 141 142 143 144 144 148 150 152 126 126 130 130 129 131 131 132 133 133 145 121 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE Print Attributes Continued Superscript Subscript Printing ESC Sn 149 Superscript Subscript Printing ResetESC T 149 Underline ESC n 150 Graphics Bit Image Mode Single Density ESC K n1 n2 124 Bit Image Mode Double Density ESC L n1 n2 124 Bit Image Mode Double Density Double Speed ESC Y n1 n2 125 Bit Image Mode Quadruple DensityESC Z n1 n2 125 Other Functions Bell BEL 123 Characters 80 9F ESC 7 129 Control Codes Characters 80 9F ESC 6 129 Printable Symbols Deselect Printer ESC Q 22 131 Initialize Parameters ESC K n1 NUL n2 n3 n4 n5 137 Print Control Codes ESC n1 n2 145 Print One Control Code ESC n 145 Select Attributes ESC n1 NUL NUL NUL n2 n3 146 Select Font Print Mode ESC In 148 Super Set Commands ESC 150 Unidirectional Printing ESC Un 151 122 Backspace Backspace ASCII Code BS Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment E
91. Code IBM PC ASCII USA Code Page 437 Serial Matrix Default Values and States Table 18 ASCII Emulation Menu Option Factory Settings Characteristic Default Setting Orientation CPI LPI Typeface Proportional Spacing Bold Print Italic Print Slashed Zero Text Position Horizontal DPI Vertical DPI Logical Form Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Physical Page Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Perforation Skip Form Length Absolute Length Funct of LPI Form Width Absolute Width Funct of CPI Host Command Portrait 10 0 6 0 Letter Gothic Disable Disable Disable Disable Top of Line 120 DPI 72 DPI 0 characters 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces 0 inches 0 inches 0 inches 0 inches Disable 6 0 inches 36 lines 4 1 inches 41 lines Enabled 79 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes IMPORTANT 80 The remainder of this chapter describes the Serial Matrix printer control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer in order to configure and invoke numerous printer functions Format for Control Code Descriptions The following information is listed for each code function where applicable and possible Name The title or function of the command ASCII Code The standard ASCII na
92. Code 27 52 Purpose Sets the current paper position as top of form Underline ASCII Code ESC n Hex Code 1B2Dn Dec Code 2745n Purpose Enables or disables automatic underlining of all characters where if n 00 02 04 all even automatic underlining is disabled if n 01 03 05 all odd automatic underlining is enabled Comment When automatic underline is enabled all characters including spaces are underlined until disabled Example The following sample illustrates automatic underlining and underlining reset CONTROL CODE ESC 1 ENABLES AUTOMATIC UNDERLINING CONTROL CODE ESC O DISABLES AUTOMATIC UNDERLINING 150 Unidirectional Printing Unidirectional Printing ASCII Code ESC Un Hex Code 1B55n Dec Code 2785n Purpose Sets or cancels unidirectional printing Discussion The printer ignores this command Vertical Tab ASCII Code VT Hex Code 0B Dec Code 11 Purpose Prints the data in the buffer and advances the paper to the next vertical tab position Comment In Proprinter XL protocol vertical tab positions are set by control code ESC B and executed by control code VT In this mode if vertical tabs are loaded the paper position moves to the next vertical tab position If a vertical tab format is not defined the paper position is advanced to the next line at the current line spacing If a vertical tab format is defined but no vertical tab positions are set between the current pr
93. Comment When the emulation receives this command a software reset is performed as if the emulation were powered up in the corresponding protocol Table 60 Printer Protocol Select n Value hex Protocol n 00 or 30 P Series n 01 or 31 P Series XQ n 02 or 32 Serial Matrix n 08 or 33 Proprinter III XL n 04 or 34 Epson FX If P Series XQ is selected then you cannot use this command to exit the protocol NOTE The printer protocol may also be selected from the control panel Software Page Eject ASCII Code SSCC J Hex Code SSCC 4A Dec Code SSCC 74 Purpose Performs a page eject through software This function is identical to a page eject executed via the control panel if available on your printer 225 Chapter 7 Bar Codes Bar Codes IMPORTANT 226 A bar code is a graphic representation of alphanumeric characters The ASCII Emulation bar codes are listed below with detailed bar code information and examples provided on the referenced pages All parameters must be separated by a semicolon unless noted otherwise Throughout this chapter actual commands required for input are shown exactly as they must be entered while all parameters associated with that command are shown in italics Optional parameters are enclosed in brackets Spaces are used only to visually separate the command parameters but do not enter these spaces in your command Table 61 Available Bar Codes
94. Data Gen Turk 108 CP 786 311 Latin 9 8859 15 601 DEC Turkish 109 IBM CP864 312 Polish POL1 602 IBM Turkish 110 IBM CP1046 313 Win CP 1250 603 Siemens Turkish 111 Arabic Lam One 314 Win CP 1252 604 PTT Turkish 112 Arabic Lam Two 315 Win CP 1257 605 IBC Turkish 113 WIN CP 1256 316 CP 858 EURO 606 Bull Turkish 114 Farsi 1 317 Lith CP 773 607 AS400 Turkish 115 Farsi 2 318 Serbo Croatic 1 608 Unisys Turkish 116 1098 Farsi 1285 319 Serbo Croatic 2 609 NCR Turkish 200 Cyrillic 866 320 CP 774 610 PST Turkish 201 Cyrillic CP 437 321 CP 775 611 Unis 1 Turkish 202 Cyrillic 113 322 ISO 8859 4 612 Code Page 853 203 Cyrillic 8859 5 400 DEC 256 Greek 613 INFO Turkish 204 ISO 915 401 ELOT 928 Greek 614 Win CP 1254 205 Code Page 855 402 Greek 3 615 Code Page 857 207 Chapter 7 The Super Set Commands Table 47 Proprinter XL Character Sets n Character Set n Character Set n Character Set 000 Code Page 437 207 Ukrainian 404 ABG Greek 001 Code Page 850 208 Bulgarian 405 ELOT 927 Greek 002 OCR A 209 Win CP 1251 406 Greek 851 003 OCR B 300 Latin 2 8859 2 407 Greek 437 004 Multinational 301 Code Page 852 408 Greek 8859 7 005 CP 858 EURO 302 Mazovia 409 Win CP 1253 100 ASMO 449 303 Kamenicky 410 Greek 813 EURO 101 ASMO 449 304 Roman 8 411 Euro 869 EURO 102 ASMO 708 305 PC 437 Slavic 500 Hebrew Old 103 ASMO 708 306 Slavic 1250 501 Hebrew New 104 MS DOS CP710 307 Code Page 865 502 Hebrew DEC 105 MS DOS CP720 308 Code Page 860 503 Latin 1
95. Dot High Density Plot Odd Dot Normal Density Other Functions Bell Character Set Select Characters 80 9F Control Codes Characters 80 9F Printable Symbols Character Set Select ECMA Extended Character Set Select International Languages Emulation Reset Extended Character Set Extended Character Set Cancel Primary Set Select Super Set Commands Downloading a Character Set Overlay SFCC G SFCC j SFCC H SFCC h BS SFCC wn SFCC E SFCC F SFCC W n SFCC k SFCC n SFCCXmn SFCC PMODE n SFCC nq ASCII CODE SFCCSn SFCCT SFCC EOT SFCC d ENQ SFCCe BEL SFCC I xyz SFCC 7 SFCC 6 SFCC OSET n SFCCRn SFCC PSET n SFCC Q SO SFCC SO SFCCn SFCC 4 Sl SFCC SI SFCC o SFCC 5 SFCC SFCC V Control Code Reference Index PAGE 44 58 27 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Backspace ASCII Code BS Hex Code 08 Dec Code 8 Purpose Moves the logical print head to the left one character space toward the first character column Comment When configured from the front panel for backspace BS moves the character position indicator the logical print head position one character space to the left at the current character pitch setting The code is ignored if the logical print head is positioned at the first character column Example If you were to print five T characters then two BS commands then two characters the output would
96. Greek DP 12 cpi 6 hex 36 Greek NLQ 10 cpi 7 hex 37 Graphics DP 10 cpi 8 hex 38 Graphics NLQ 10 cpi 9 hex 39 Scientific DP 10 cpi 10 hex 3A Scientific DP 12 cpi 11 hex 3B Scientific NLQ 10 cpi 12 hex 3C Multinational at Primary set mode and pitch 90 Comment Characters 80 9F Control Codes An asterisk character nex 2A may be substituted for the numeric values of x y or z If the asterisk is the value selected for x the character set does not change If is the value selected for y or z the previously selected international language and or extended character set for the selected character set are used The character set international language and extended character set can also be selected from the printer control panel The control code setting overrides the control panel selection Except for the asterisk value discussed above values other than those shown in the tables results in the control sequence being terminated Characters 80 9F Control Codes ASCII Code ESC 7 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 1B 37 27 55 Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 through 9F are control codes Also includes hex codes 03 through 06 and 15 in the Serial Matrix printer protocol Cancels Character Set Select activated by ESC 6 or ESC u This feature is also selectable from the control panel see the Alternate Set 80 9F parameter in the configuration chapter of your User s Man
97. HIRD FOURTH and FIFTH digit of the zero suppressed number 00456 same as above 00583 3 2 Example 412022 the first two digits plus 200 41200 same as above 00202 4 3 Example 876543 the first three digits plus 00 87600 000 plus the FOURTH and FIFTH digit 00054 5 4 Example 753774 6 5 6 7 8 9 Examples 213756 517019 the first four digits plus O 75370 the first five digits of the zero suppressed number 21375 51701 0000 plus the FIFTH digit 00007 0000 plus the SIXTH digit 00006 00009 267 Chapter 7 Bar Codes UPC Shipping The UPCSHIP bar code structure is shown in Figure 24 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC ro POSITION 9 Zei nt be Set eg 1 l UPPER GUARD BAND 1 ala miri I QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET __ LOWER GUARD BAND J l l L OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 24 UPCSHIP Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones The quiet zones should be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning Both start and stop codes contain bar
98. Hebrew 106 Sakr CP714 309 Latin 1 8859 1 504 Win CP 1255 107 Aptec CP715 310 Latin 5 8859 9 600 Data Gen Turk 108 CP 786 311 Latin 9 8859 15 601 DEC Turkish 109 IBM 864 312 Polish POL1 602 IBM Turkish 110 IBM 1046 313 Win CP 1250 603 Siemens Turkish 111 Arabic Lam One 314 Win CP 1252 604 PTT Turkish 112 Arabic Lam Two 315 Win CP 1257 605 IBC Turkish 113 Win CP 1256 316 CP 858 EURO 606 Bull Turkish 114 Farsi 1 317 Lith CP 773 607 AS400 Turkish 115 Farsi 2 318 Serbo Croatic 1 608 Unisys Turkish 116 1098 Farsi 1285 319 Serbo Croatic 2 609 NCR Turkish 200 Cyrillic 866 320 CP 774 610 PST Turkish 201 Cyrillic CP 437 321 CP 775 611 Unis 1 Turkish 202 Cyrillic 113 322 CP 8859 4 612 Code Page 853 203 Cyrillic 8859 5 400 DEC 256 Greek 613 INFO Turkish 204 ISO 915 401 ELOT 928 Greek 614 Win CP 1254 205 Code Page 855 402 Greek 3 615 Code Page 857 206 Cyrillic 7 Bit 403 ABY Greek 208 Character Set Selection UTF8 T5000r Only Character Set Selection UTF8 T5000r Only ASCII Code SSCC RC Hex Code SSCC52C Dec Code SSCC82C Purpose Selects the UTF 8 character set C UTF Example SSCC R UTF Character Spacing n 240 Inch ASCII Code SSCC I n uppercase i Hex Code SSCC 49n Dec Code SSCC 73n Purpose Specifies the character spacing in n 240 inch increments where n 001 through 999 three ASCII digits Comment When the n 240 inch character spacing command is received all character printing is at n 2
99. I is combined with Double High printing only Double High printing OCCUIS Example The following sample illustrates double high character printing CONTROL CODE ESC w 1 SELECTS DOUBLE HIGH PRINTING ESC w 0 CANCELS DOUBLE HIGH PRINTING Emphasized Print ASCII Code ESC E Hex Code 1B 45 Dec Code 2769 Purpose X Selects emphasized character print format Comment When the emphasized print control code is received all characters are printed in emphasized print until reset by the emphasized print reset control code or printer reset Emphasized print is ignored during superscript or subscript printing and when 15 20 cpi characters have been selected 96 Example Emphasized Print Reset The following sample illustrates emphasized character printing CONTROL CODE ESC E SELECTS EMPHASIZED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE ESC F CANCELS EMPHASIZED CHARACTER PRINTING Emphasized Print Reset ASCII Code ESC F Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example 1B 46 27 70 Resets emphasized character printing The emphasized print reset control code only resets the emphasized print character attribute See the Emphasized Print example Emulation Reset ASCII Code ESC o Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 1B 40 27 64 Initializes all print mode related parameters to their power up configuration Print mode line spacing international language selection margins form length skip over pe
100. I XL Emulation 137 Initialize Printer Epson FX 1050 Emulation 182 Interleaved 2 5 and German I 2 5 Bar Code 249 International Languages Epson FX 1050 Emulation 166 P Series Emulation 35 Serial Matrix Emulation 92 Italic Character Set Epson FX 1050 Emulation 193 Italic Printing Cancel Epson FX 1050 Emulation 182 Italic Printing Epson FX 1050 Emulation 182 L Line Feed Epson FX 1050 Emulation 183 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 139 P Series Emulation 47 P Series XQ Emulation 71 Serial Matrix Emulation 103 Line Feed n 216 Inch Epson FX 1050 Emulation 183 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 140 Serial Matrix Emulation 104 Line Spacing n 216 Inch Epson FX 1050 Emulation 186 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 144 P Series Emulation 52 Serial Matrix Emulation 107 Line Spacing n 288 Inch Super Set Programming 214 Line Spacing n 72 Inch Epson FX 1050 Emulation 185 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 143 P Series Emulation 51 Serial Matrix Emulation 106 Line Spacing 1 6 Inch Epson FX 1050 Emulation 184 IBM Proprinter Ill XL Emulation 141 P Series Emulation 48 Serial Matrix Emulation 105 Line Spacing 1 8 Inch Epson FX 1050 Emulation 184 IBM Proprinter Ill XL Emulation 141 P Series Emulation 49 Serial Matrix Emulation 105 Line Spacing 7 72 Inch Epson FX 1050 Emulation 185 IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation 142 P Series Emulation 50 Serial Matrix Emulation 106 Line spacing 8 or 10 3 Ipi P Series Emulati
101. IM The FIM Facing Identification Mark bar code structure is shown in Figure 13 and described on the following pages The left boundary must begin 3 inches from the right edge of the mail piece The right most bar must be 2 inches 1 8 inch from the right edge of the mail piece Bars are 5 8 inch 1 8 inch tall the top of the bars must be no lower than 1 8 inch from the top edge of the mail piece and may touch the top edge of the mail piece The bar code baseline must be within 1 8 inch from the bottom edge of the clear zone NOTE _ Illustration is not to scale Return Address Area Optional Line NON ADDRESS DATA Top Line NAME OF RECIPIENT Optional Line INFORMATION ATTENTION LINE Line Above Last DELIVERY ADDRESS Last Line POST OFFICE STATE ZIP Figure 13 FIM Structure NOTE Additional information regarding FIM bar code requirements can be obtained from the U S Postal Service s Publication 25 A Manual to Business Mail Preparation Quiet Zone The bar code structure requires a completely blank 1 1 4 inch wide 5 8 inch tall quiet zone reserved for only the appropriate FIM pattern You must provide sufficient space for this zone 247 Chapter 7 Bar Codes Start Stop Code The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning
102. IN GOTHIC 12 CPI PRINTED IN GOTHIC 13 CPI PRINTED IN GOTHIC 15 CPI PRINTED IN GOTHIC 17 CPI PRINTING IN COURIER FONT PRINTED IN COURIER 10 CPI PRINTED IN COURIER 1 CPI PRINTED IN COURIER 13 CPI PRINTED IN COURIER 15 CPI PRINTED IN COURIER 17 CPI PRINTING IN OCR A FONT PRINTED IN OCR A LOCPI PRINTING IN OCR B FONT PRINTED IN OCR B 10 CPI 111 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Printer Deselect ASCII Code DC3 Hex Code 13 Dec Code 19 Purpose Places printer in the deselected state Comment When the configuration parameter PRINTER SELECT is enabled this control code disables the printer from receiving and printing data from the host Until a DC1 Printer Select command is received all subsequent data to the printer is ignored Also when the configuration parameter PRINTER SELECT is enabled and saved in the configuration the printer powers up in the deselected state Printer Select ASCII Code DC1 Hex Code 11 Dec Code 17 Purpose Places printer in the selected state Comment When the configuration parameter PRINTER SELECT is enabled this control code allows the printer to receive and print data from the host Printer Deselect DC3 disables the printer from receiving data Skip Over Perforation ASCII Code ESCN n Hex Code 1B4En Dec Code 2778n Purpose Selects the number of lines at the current line spacing for the paper to skip at the bottom of the perfora
103. If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing the remainder is added to the next paper motion command Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript overlapping lines may occur Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap The following example illustrates n 216 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC 3 50 SETS LINE SPACING AT 50 216 INCH INCREMENTS FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED 107 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Overscoring ASCII Code ESC _ n Hex Code 1B5Fn Dec Code 2795n Purpose Enables or disables automatic overscoring of all characters where n 0 to disable automatic overscoring hex 00 or hex 30 n 1 to enable automatic overscoring hex 01 or hex 31 Comment When automatic overscore is enabled all characters including Spaces are overscored until disabled Example The following sample illustrates automatic overscoring and overscoring reset CONTROL CODE ESC 1 ENABLES AUTOMATIC OVERSCORING CONTROL CODE ESC O DISABLES AUTOMATIC OVERSCORING Print Mode Pitch Selection ASCII Code ESC X mnESC nq Hex Code 1B 58 mniB 5B n 71 Dec Code 2788 mn27 91 n113 Purpose Selects the print mode Letter Gothic Courier or OCR and character pitch in characters per inch cpi where
104. Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Physical Page Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Perforation Skip Form Length Absolute Length Funct of LPI Form Width Absolute Width Funct of CPI Host Commands Portrait 10 0 6 0 Letter Gothic Enabled Disable Disable Disable Top of Line 120 DPI 72 DPI 0 characters 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces 0 inches 0 inches 0 inches 0 inches Disable 6 0 inches 36 lines 4 1 inches 41 lines Enabled 119 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes IMPORTANT 120 The following information is listed for each code function where applicable ASCII Code The standard ASCII name for the control code Hex Code The control code numeric equivalent in hexadecimal Dec Code The control code numeric equivalent in decimal Purpose The function s of the control code Comment Any exceptions or limitations to use of the control code Example Where applicable a sample is shown using the control code along with the result of running the program If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that are defined in the control code description unpredictable results may occur Escape Control Code Header Proprinter XL codes use only ESC as the control code introducer For example to enable bold print use the bold prin
105. Maxicode bar code is divided into a primary message and a secondary message The primary message has a fixed structure while the secondary message has a free format Standard Data Field A standard Maxicode data field has its primary message structured as shown in Table 72 The data following the primary message is the secondary message and has a free format Table 72 Standard Data Fields Character Title Data Positions 0 2 Class of Service Numeric 3 5 Country Code Numeric 6 14 Postal Code 9 Digit Numeric for US OR 6 Digit Alphanumeric for Canada 15 16 Separator so 17 Secondary Message Free Format 250 UPS Shipping Data Field This syntax begins with seven encoded data characters followed by a date Maxicode yy The first four characters are the Message Header and the next five are the Transportation Data Format Header The format of the Message Header is gt Rs The Transportation Data Format Header is O1Gs lt yy gt where lt yy gt is the year and G s and R s are control characters The structure is shown in Table 73 Table 73 UPS Shipping Data Fields character Title Data Positions 0 3 Message Header D gt Rs 4 8 Transportation Data 01Gs lt yy gt Format Header 9 17 Postal Code 9 Digit Numeric for US OR 6 Digit Alphanumeric for Canada 18 Separator Gs 19 21 Country Code Numeric 22 Separator Gs 23 25 Class of
106. NLQ 02 Courier NLQ 03 Ignored 04 Ignored 05 Courier NLQ 06 Courier NLQ 07 Courier NLQ italic OB Courier NLQ italic OF Comment The current pitch is not affected If an ignored value is used the Print Mode is set to Letter Gothic DP Select Proportional Spacing ASCII Code ESC P n Hex Code 1B50n Dec Code 2780n Purpose Enables disables proportional spacing of characters where n 1 3 5 any odd value enables proportional spacing n 0 2 4 any even value disables proportional spacing Comment This command is ignored when a non proportional font is used 148 Superscript Subscript Printing Superscript Subscript Printing ASCII Code ESC S n Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example 1B 53n 27 83 n Selects superscript or subscript printing if n 0 2 4 any even value superscript printing is enabled if n 1 3 5 any odd value subscript printing is enabled Superscript Subscript font prints at one half the normal vertical character height and at twice the normal vertical density When the superscript subscript control code is received all characters are superscript or subscript until reset by the superscript subscript reset control code or printer reset Emphasized print is ignored in the superscript subscript print mode Both superscript and subscript characters can be printed in the same character column using the Backspace BS control code
107. NNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNANNNNNNNNNNNNNN 85 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Bit Image Mode Quadruple Density ASCII Code ESC Z n1 n2 Hex Code 1B 5A n1 n2 Dec Code 27 90 n1 n2 Purpose Selects Quadruple Density Bit Image graphics where n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment For detailed information see the Bit Image section in Chapter 8 The printed density in this mode is 120 dpi horizontal and 72 dpi vertical if selected when Letter Gothic print mode is active Example The following example produces quadruple density graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image Mode example Note that the amount of data must be quadrupled for quadruple density the data is used 108 times rather than 27 QUAD DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS Bold Print Set ASCII Code ESC G Hex Code 1B 47 Dec Code 27 71 Purpose Selects bold character printing Comment When the bold character printing control code is received all characters are printed in bold until reset by the bold print reset control code or printer reset Bold Print is the same as printing double strike Example The following sample illustrates bold character p
108. PRINTRONIX LinePrinter Plus Emulation for SL5000 T5000 series Printers Programmer s Reference Manual LinePrinter Plus Emulation for SL5000 T5000 series Printers Programmer s Reference Manual PRINTRONIX e Printronix Inc makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding this material including but not limited to implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Printronix Inc shall not be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this material or for any damages whether direct indirect incidental or consequential in connection with the furnishing distribution performance or use of this material The information in this manual is subject to change without notice This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright No part of this document may be reproduced copied translated or incorporated in any other material in any form or by any means whether manual graphic electronic mechanical or otherwise without the prior written consent of Printronix Inc COPYRIGHT 1999 2007 PRINTRONIX INC All rights reserved Trademark Acknowledgements ANSI is a registered trademark of American National Standards Institute Inc AS 400 IBM and Proprinter are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation Bull is a registered trademark of Bull Information Systems S A Data General is a registered trademark of Da
109. Purpose where 1B 4B n1 n2 27 75 n1 n2 Selects normal density bit image graphics of 60 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically n1 256n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment Example DATA consist of 8 bit dot columns with the MSB at the top and 1 bits producing dots For more information refer to Chapter 8 Graphics You can change graphics density with the ESC command The following example produces a pattern of standard density bit image graphics The 9 data bit pattern is repeated 27 times Compare this example to the double density and quadruple density examples SINGLE DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS TISSI YNINNININSININ NINY Y NNINININININININ 177 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Graphics Double Density ASCII Code ESC L n1 n2 Hex Code 1B4C n1 n2 Dec Code 27 76n1n2 Purpose Selects double density bit image graphics of 120 dots per inch horizontally and 72 dots per inch vertically where n1 256n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of t
110. R A OCR B N A N A OCR is 10 cpi only Epson Set ASCII USA Epson Set French Epson Set German Epson Set English UK Epson Set Danish I Epson Set Swedish Epson Set Italian Epson Set Spanish I Epson Set Japanese Epson Set Norwegian Epson Set Danish II Epson Set Spanish II Epson Set Latin American I Epson Set French Canadian XI X X X X X mK X X X X X X X X XI X zl X X X XI X X X X X X X X Epson Set Latin American II 160 Control Code Index Control Code Index The following index lists the control codes by function and lists the ASCII mnemonic and page number NOTE Some control code functions can also be selected at the operator panel Produces non Epson behavior in your printer FUNCTION Vertical Motion and Print Execution Carriage Return Form Feed Line Feed Line Feed n 216 Inch Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi Line Spacing 7 72 Inch t Line Spacing n 72 Inch Line Spacing n 216 Inch Paper Out Detection Disable Paper Out Detection Enable Select Vertical Tab Channel Set Forms Length by Lines Set Forms Length in Inches Set Vertical Tabs in Channels Skip Over Perforation Skip Over Perforation Cancel Vertical Tab Execute Vertical Tab Set Clear Horizontal Motion Backspace Carriage Return Character Pitch 10 cpi Character Pitch 12 cpi C
111. READABLE DATA FIELD SR SC POSITION e wee ee ee ee ee rm rm rm rm ee ee rm re rm rm 1 i Figure 8 Code 39 Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent standard alphanumeric characters Each wide or narrow bar or space is one element each character in the data field has nine elements The structure is three wide elements bars or spaces out of the nine total elements which compose one character Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol 236 Code 39 Check Digit The optional modulo 43 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning Table 67 Code 39 Character Set ASCII CODE39 ASCII CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39 ASCII CODE 39 NUL U SP Space
112. SC SO control code is received the current line is printed double wide and automatically reset This control code can be reset by a paper motion control code LF VT CR etc by the DC4 double wide cancel code ESC Emulation Reset CAN or ESC W double wide print When set by SO double wide print is not cancelled by the Autowrap feature 98 Extended Character Set Example The following sample illustrates Expanded Print for one line only Another example of expanded printing is shown in the Expanded Double Wide Print description above CONTROL CODE SO SELECTS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING FOR ONE LINE ONLY Extended Character Set ASCII Code ESC 4 Hex Code 1B 34 Dec Code 27 52 Purpose Accesses the extended character set in the range hex AO through FF using codes hex 20 through hex 7F Comment This code is used in 7 bit systems as if data bit 8 was set to 1 For example sending code hex 20 accesses the symbol at code point hex AO If a printable symbol is not available at the code point a space is printed ESC 4 is not cancelled by the next paper motion command Example The following sample illustrates Extended Character Set CONTROL CODE ESC 4 SELECTS THE EXTENDED CHARACTER SET AND ESC 5 SELECTS THE PRIMARY CHARACTER SET AHICH IS DISPLAYED BENEATH THE EXTENDED CHARACTER SET Lp HHFH ABCDEFGH 99 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Extended Character Set Cancel
113. Support Center 323 Printronix Supplies Department 323 Corporate Offices vi sive eere leere etin eee e nna 324 Introduction Overview WARNING CAUTION IMPORTANT The Printronix LinePrinter Plus LP Emulation supports the following printer protocols e Printronix P Series P3000 6000 9000 hereafter called P Series e Printronix P Series XQ P300 600 hereafter called P Series XQ e Printronix Serial Matrix e IBM Proprinter III XL hereafter called Proprinter XL e Epson FX 1050 A variety of paper sizes and densities are supported About This Manual This manual is designed so you can quickly find the information you need to use your LinePrinter Plus Emulation software Warnings and Special Information Read and comply with all information highlighted under special headings WARNING tells you about conditions that could cause you physical harm CAUTION tells you about conditions that could damage the printer or related equipment IMPORTANT gives you information vital to proper operation NOTE Information affecting printer operation considered important enough to emphasize Glossary The Glossary defines computer terms and acronyms used in this manual It is located just before the Index 17 Chapter 1 Introduction Software Features The LinePrinter Plus Emulation software provides the following features e Printer Protocols Printronix P Series Printronix P Series XQ Printronix
114. T CONFIG on the control panel then press Enter e sthe problem with a new install or an existing printer e Description of the problem be specific e Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem faxing of these samples may be required Americas 714 368 2686 Europe Middle East and Africa 31 24 6489 311 Asia Pacific 65 6548 4114 http www printronix com support aspx Printronix Supplies Department Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies Americas 800 733 1900 Europe Middle East and Africa 33 1 46 25 1900 Asia Pacific 65 6548 4116 or 65 6548 4182 http www printronix com supplies parts aspx 323 Appendix F Corporate Offices Corporate Offices 324 Printronix Inc 14600 Myford Road P O Box 19559 Irvine CA 92623 9559 Phone 714 368 2300 Fax 714 368 2600 Printronix Inc Nederland BV P O Box 163 Nieuweweg 283 NL 6600 Ad Wijchen The Netherlands Phone 31 24 6489489 Fax 31 24 6489499 Printronix Schweiz GmbH 42 Changi South Street 1 Changi South Industrial Estate Singapore 486763 Phone 65 6542 0110 Fax 65 6546 1588 Visit the Printronix web site at www printronix com Index A Alternate character set deselect P Series XQ Emulation 66 Alternate character set Emulation 67 Application identifiers UCC EAN 128 259 ASCII Character Set 295 Attribute Set Codes IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 120 Serial
115. TNET code can be a part of the address block and appear anywhere within a vertical 4 inch area across the length of the mail piece Return Address Area Postage Area ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA SR SC POSITION peer ou ru I QUIET ZONE i PE l QUIET i START BAR CODE DATA FIELD STOP aas CODE CODE ZONE I I UIET ZONE ER t EE J CHECK DIGIT Figure 19 POSTNET Structure NOTE Additional information regarding POSTNET bar code requirements can be obtained from the U S Postal Service s Publication 25 A Manual to Business Mail Preparation 255 Chapter 256 7 Bar Codes Quiet Zone The bar code structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which extends 4 75 inches from the right edge of the mail piece In addition a minimum quiet zone of 0 040 inch above and below the bar code data must also be provided You must provide sufficient space for this zone Start Stop Code The start and stop codes are referred to as framing bars in POSTNET The start and stop codes are each one tall bar one identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bar code scanning in a left to right direction only Data Field The bar code data produces a single field of 30 bars for a 5 digit field 50 bars for a 9 digit data field or 60 bars for an 11 digit data field The bars are grouped in sets of five
116. The Serial Matrix condensed print control code SI affects all subsequent characters After receiving code SI all characters are printed in condensed print until reset by ESC M ESC P the condensed print reset control code DC2 printer reset or a new print mode control code The Serial Matrix SI code hex OF is equivalent to the ESC SI code If condensed print is not allowed in the current print mode the code is ignored Example The following sample illustrates condensed character printing and reset CONTROL CODE SI SELECTS CONDENSED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE DC2 RESETS CONDENSED CHARACTER PRINTING Condensed Print Reset ASCII Code DC2 Hex Code 12 Dec Code 18 Purpose Resets condensed character printing to 10 cpi Comment The condensed print reset control code selects 10 cpi character pitch Other print attributes are not affected Other control code sequences which cancel condensed print are ESC M ESC P ESC or a new print mode control code Delete ASCII Code DEL Hex Code 7F Dec Code 127 Purpose Deletes the previously received character on a line Comment Characters that have been truncated due to line length restrictions are not affected by this code 94 Elongated Double High Print One Line Only Elongated Double High Print One Line Only ASCII Code ESC h Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example 1B 68 27 104 Selects elongated double high character printing for
117. URNS OFF ITALIC CHARACTER PRINTING Italic Printing Cancel ASCII Code ESC 5 Hex Code 1B535 Dec Code 2753 Purpose Turns off italic character printing 182 Line Feed Line Feed ASCII Code LF Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment OA 10 Prints the data in the buffer if any and advances the vertical character position a distance of one line at the current line spacing The logical print head keeps the same distance from the margin The current line is printed and the logical printhead moves down a distance equal to the current line spacing If there are no dots paper moves and no printing occurs When possible successive line feeds are accumulated and moved at once This code cancels all one line only emphasis and font selections double wide from SO and ESC SO and unidirectional printing from ESC lt Line Feed n 216 Inch ASCII Code ESC J n Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example 1B 4An 2774n Immediately advances the paper n 216 inch n 0 through 255 n 0 is ignored Paper movement occurs in multiples of 3 216 inch This command produces an immediate line feed but does not affect line spacing or produce a carriage return Any one line only print attributes in effect are canceled Small values of n may result in overlapping lines Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as double high superscript or subscript characters are used on the same line The
118. Values of n other than 6 or 8 causes an error message Command Line Error Messages are listed in Table 2 on page 25 SFCC 2 asserts n 72 inch line spacing as set by SFCC A page 51 If no distance has been set by SFCC A the distance is 1 6 inch The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting Example The following example illustrates 1 6 inch line spacing and assumes that a distance has not been set by SFCC A SET LINE SPACING AT 1 6 INCH ESC 2 SETS LINE SPACING TO 6 LPI OR AS SET BY ESC A CONTROL CODE ESC 2 SETS LINE SPACING AT 6 LPI FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED 48 Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi ASCII Code SFCCO SFCCLPI n Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example SFCC 30 SFCC 48 Specifies continuous line spacing at 1 8 inch increments 8 Ipi When the 1 8 inch line spacing control code is received all lines are printed at 8 Ipi until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting For SFCC LPI n the value of n can be 6 or 8 only If n 8 this command sets line spacing to 1 8 inch Values of n other than 6 or 8 causes an error message Command Line Error Messages are listed in Table 2 on page 25 The following example illustrates 1 8 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC O SETS LINE
119. Width Form Width Char 02 STX Enable Disable 1 to 15 lines Bottom of Line Enable Disable 06 0 inches 152 4 mm 36 lines 08 5 inches 216 0 mm 85 characters 63 Chapter 3 Configuring the XQ Emulation with Control Codes Configuring the XQ Emulation with Control Codes IMPORTANT 64 The remainder of this chapter describes the P Series XQ printer control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer in order to configure and invoke numerous printer functions Format for Control Code Descriptions The following information is listed for each code function where applicable and possible Name The title or function of the command ASCII Code The standard ASCII name for the control code Hex Code The code s numeric equivalent in hexadecimal Dec Code The code s numeric equivalent in decimal Purpose The function s of the control code Discussion A description of exceptions or limitations to normal use Example A sample is provided for some control codes when it is possible to illustrate the effect of a control code or if a specific syntax is required to complete the program statement i e Horizontal Tab set Vertical Tab set clear If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that are defined in the control code description unpredictable results may occur Edit Mode Any printable character in the data stream can replace printable ch
120. Zis the extended character set for the selected character set Table 21 Table 19 Character Set Select x x Character Set 0 hex 30 IBM PC hex 31 Multinational 2 hex 32 ECMA Latin 1 3 hex 33 DEC Multinational 89 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Table 20 International Language Select y X 0 hex 30 X 1 hex 31 X 2 hex 32 X 3 hex 33 4 IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Multinational 0 hex 30 ASCII USA ASCII USA ASCII USA ASCII USA 1 hex 31 French EBCDIC German French 2 hex 32 German Swedish German 3 hex 33 English UK Danish English UK 4 hex 34 Danish Norwegian Norwegian Danish 5 hex 35 Swedish Finnish Swedish 6 hex 36 Italian English UK Italian 7 hex 37 Spanish Dutch Spanish 8 hex 38 Japanese French Japanese 9 hex 39 French Canadian Spanish French Canadian 10 hex 3A Latin American Italian Dutch 11 hex 3B Norwegian Turkish Finnish 12 hex 3C Danish ll Japanese Swiss 13 hex 3D Spanish ll 14 hex 3E Latin American ll Table 21 Extended Character Set Select z x 0 hex 30 X 1 hex 31 x 2 hex 32 x 3 hex 33 IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Multinational 0 hex 30 IBM PC 0437 Mult Extended Set Barcode 10 cpi DEC Mult Ext Set 1 hex 31 IBM PC 0850 Mult DP 10 cpi 2 hex 32 Mult DP 12 cpi 3 hex 33 Mult NLQ 10 cpi 4 hex 34 Greek DP 10 cpi 5 hex 35
121. abic Lam One 314 Win CP 1252 604 PTT Turkish 112 Arabic Lam Two 315 Win CP 1257 605 IBC Turkish 113 Win CP 1256 316 CP 858 EURO 606 Bull Turkish 114 Farsi 1 317 Lith CP 773 607 AS400 Turkish 115 Farsi 2 317 Serbo Croatic 1 608 Unisys Turkish 116 1098 Farsi 1285 318 Serbo Croatic 2 609 NCR Turkish 200 Cyrillic 866 319 CP 774 610 PST Turkish 201 Cyrillic CP 437 320 CP 775 611 Unis 1 Turkish 202 Cyrillic 113 321 ISO 8859 4 612 Code Page 853 203 Cyrillic 8859 5 400 DEC 256 Greek 613 INFO Turkish 204 ISO 915 401 ELOT 928 Greek 614 Win CP 1254 205 Code Page 855 402 Greek 3 615 Code Page 857 206 Character Set Selection Table 46 P Series and Serial Matrix Character Sets n Character Set n Character Set n Character Set 000 IBM Code Page 437 206 Cyrillic 7 Bit 403 ABY Greek 001 Multinational 207 Ukranian 404 ABG Greek 002 EMCA Latin 1 208 Bulgarian 405 ELOT 927 Greek 003 DEC Multinational 209 Win CP 1251 406 Greek 851 004 CP 858 EURO 300 Latin 2 8859 2 407 Greek 437 005 OCR A 301 Latin 2 852 408 Greek 8859 7 006 OCR B 302 Mazovia 409 WIN CP 1253 100 ASMO 449 303 Kamenicky 410 Greek 813 EURO 101 ASMO 449 304 Roman 8 411 Greek 869 EURO 102 ASMO 708 305 PC 437 Slavic 500 Hebrew Old 103 ASMO 708 306 Slavic 1250 501 Hebrew New 104 MS DOS CP 710 307 Code Page 865 502 Hebrew DEC 105 MS DOS CP 720 308 Code Page 860 503 Latin 1 Hebrew 106 Sakr CP 714 309 Latin 1 8859 1 504 Win CP 1255 107 Aptec CP 715 310 Latin 5 8859 9 600
122. ace minimum of seven modules on the form for the quiet zones The number system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone 263 Chapter 264 7 Bar Codes Start Center Stop Codes The start center stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of the bar code These codes are automatically provided Number System Character The number system character field allows you to provide a code to a class or type of item The first character in the data field is used as the number system character Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent a limited character set numbers 0 9 and Special Characters Start Center and Stop The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven modules The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right data field to permit read direction sensing Readable Data The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The number system character is included in the check digit algorithm UPC E UPC E The UPC E bar code structure is shown in Figure 23 and described be
123. acter Set Only Print Mode Pitch Select Barcode Letter Gothic 10 cpi Multinational Letter Gothic 10 cpi Multinational Letter Gothic 12 cpi Multinational Courier 10 cpi Greek Letter Gothic 10 cpi Greek Letter Gothic 12 cpi Greek Courier 10 cpi Graphics Letter Gothic 10 cpi ODN Oo Om fF WN Ou Graphics Courier 10 cpi 9 Scientific Letter Gothic 10 cpi 10 Scientific Letter Gothic 12 cpi 11 Scientific Courier 10 cpi 12 Multinational at Primary Character Set Mode and Pitch 34 Character Set Select International Languages Character Set Select International Languages ASCII Code SFCC PSET n SFCCRn Hex Code SFCC 52 n Dec Code SFCC 82 n Purpose Specifies the international language set identified by n in the basic character set selected from the control panel ECMA 94 Latin 1 IBM PC Multinational and DEC Multinational where n corresponds to the language as shown in Table 7 Table 7 International Character Sets Character Set Selected Peer EOMA Patiti oaar 60050 RAE 0 ASCII USA ASCII USA ASCII USA 1 German French French 2 Swedish German German 3 Danish English English UK 4 Norwegian Danish Norw Danish 5 Finnish Swedish Swedish 6 English Italian Italian 7 Dutch Spanish Spanish 8 French Japanese Japanese 9 Spanish French Canadian French Canadian 10 Italian Latin American Dutch 11 Turkish Norwegian 3B Finnish 12 Japanese Danish ll 3C Swiss 13 Spanish ll 3D
124. acters following the CR are printed over the previous characters on the line If identical characters are placed in the same position on the line those characters are printed in bold double strike print when the Overstrike Mode is enabled from the control panel If the DEFINE CR CODE submenu displays Define CR Code CR CR LF control code CR is converted to perform a carriage return and line feed function The CR code in Serial Matrix printer protocol cancels expanded double wide print when set by code SO and ESC SO single line printing attribute Character Pitch 10 cpi ASCII Code ESC P Hex Code 1B 50 Dec Code 27 80 Purpose Sets character pitch to 10 cpi Comment Control Code ESC X can also be used to select a character pitch of 10 cpi See Print Mode Pitch Selection on page 108 88 Character Pitch 12 cpi Character Pitch 12 cpi ASCII Code ESCM ESC Hex Code 1B4D 1B3A Dec Code 2777 2758 Purpose Sets character pitch to 12 cpi Comment Control Code ESC X can also be used to select a character pitch of 12 cpi See Print Mode Pitch Selection on page 108 Character Set Select ASCII Code ESC xyz lowercase L Hex Code 1B6C xyz Dec Code 27 108 xyz Purpose Selects the character set extended character set and the international language for a specific character set where x is the character set Table 19 y is the international language for the selected character set Table 20
125. aded by this control code the table created by this control code can be saved into the printer power up configuration and selected from the host interface or the control panel The table does not take effect until requested to activate the table from the host use the sequence SFCC RX The substitution table starts with the currently active character set and overlays characters on top of it The table is deactivated by the command sequence SFCC RO or when the character set is changed When the table is selected via the control panel the message DOWNLOADED displays 37 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Example The following sample illustrates Downloading a Character Set Overlay using a Printronix number Control code SOH V 2E65E224E46SE225E Downloads a language that replaces A with Alpha and B with Beta Control code SOH RX activates the downloaded Language A B x B SOH V 2 E 65 E 224 E 66 E 225 E SOH V Special Function Control Code SFCC header introducing the Download a Character Set Overlay command 2 The quantity of entries characters in the substitution table in this example the letters A and B E The numeric field terminator for overlay using a Printronix number required after each numeric field 65 The decimal address code for the first character in the current character set that causes the substituted character to be printed uppercase A alpha 224 The decimal symbol
126. al at Primary set mode and pitch Comment An asterisk character hex 2A may be substituted for the numeric values of x y or z If the asterisk is the value selected for x the character set does not change If is the value selected for y or z the previously selected international language and or extended character set for the selected character set is used The character set international language and extended character set can also be selected from the printer control panel The control code settings override the control panel selection Except for the asterisk value discussed above values other than those shown in the tables result in the control sequence being terminated 32 Characters 80 9F Control Codes CHARACTER SET SELECT THIS IS THE IBM ASCII CHARACTER SET UNDERNEATH IS THE EXTENDED SET Ue ph pth EY Ag m LU pr t H PLL bhr t be THIS IS THE ECMA 94 LATIN 1 CHARACTER SET UNDERNEATH IS THE EXTENDED SET OE EO GEA AATA TAGETys AGOATAAA AEAOAAGAO OAG Characters 80 9F Control Codes ASCII Code SFCC 7 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment SFCC 37 SFCC 55 Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 through 9F are control codes Cancels Character Set Select activated by SFCC 6 This feature is also selectable from the control panel see the Alternate Set 80 9F parameter in the configuration chapter of your User s Manual Characters 80 9F Printabl
127. al mode Print Speed ASCII Code SSCCe1 n Hex Code SSCC65313Bn Dec Code SSCC 101 4959 n where n speed of engine in inches per second ranging from 0001 through 0099 All other values are ignored Reboot ASCII Code SSCC Q Hex Code SSCC 51 Dec Code SSCC 81 Purpose Reboots the printer Slew Speed ASCII Code SSCC N n Hex Code SSCC 4E n Dec Code SSCC78n where n slew speed in inches per second ranging from 01 through 99 All other values are ignored 223 Chapter 7 TheSuper Set Commands Tear Strip Time ASCII Code SSCC n Hex Code SSCC 22n Dec Code SSCC34n Purpose When using tear off strip media handling this option sets the time in seconds with the buffer empty that the printer waits before it advances media to the tear off position where n time in seconds range from 01 through 60 If the value of nis 61 or greater 60 is selected Vertical Image Shift ASCII Code SSCC v n Hex Code SSCC 76 2D n Dec Code SSCC 118 45 n Purpose Shifts image up or down in 1 1000 inches The brackets around the symbol indicate it is optional do not use these brackets in the command where shifts the image down No will shift the image up n thousandths of inches to shift the image vertically range 0000 through 1000 224 Printer Protocol Select Printer Protocol Select ASCII Code SSCC P n Hex Code SSCC 50n Dec Code SSCC 80n Purpose Selects changes printer protocol
128. alue expanded print is selected if n 0 2 4 any even value expanded print is reset Comment When expanded print using ESC W is received all characters are printed double wide until reset by the expanded print reset control code or DC4 Also see control code SO Expanded Double Wide print for one line only Example The following sample illustrates expanded character printing and expanded character printing reset CONTROL CODE ESC W 1 SELECTS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE ESC W O RESETS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING 132 Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only ASCII Code SO ESC SO Hex Code OE 1B OE Dec Code 14 27 14 Purpose Selects double wide print for one line only where If the emulation is set at 10 cpi it is set to 5 cpi If the emulation is set at 12 cpi it is set to 6 cpi If the emulation is set at 17 1 cpi itis set to 8 55 cpi Comment This expanded print control code is a line by line print attribute when the SO control code is received the current line is printed double wide and automatically reset This control code can be reset by a paper motion control code LF VT CR etc by the DC4 double wide cancel code CAN or ESC W double wide print When set by SO double wide print is not cancelled by the Autowrap feature Example The following sample illustrates Expanded Print for one line only CONTROL CODE SO SELECTS Anot
129. alue of n2 If n1 03 there is no n3 04 Set character height line feed and character settings according to the values of n2 and n3 where n2 can take on the following characteristics Table 32 Select Attributes n2 Values n2 Hex Function 00 No change 01 Set single height characters 02 Set double height characters 10 Set single line spacing 11 Set single height characters and single line spacing 12 Set double height characters and single line spacing 20 Set double line spacing 21 Set single height characters and double line spacing 22 Set double height characters and double line spacing 146 Select Attributes where n3 can take on the following characteristics Table 33 Select Attributes n3 Values n3 Hex Function 00 No change 01 Set single width characters 02 Set double width characters Comment All other values of n1 n2 and n3 are ignored Example CONTROL CODE ESC n1 NUL NUL NUL n2 n3 SELECTS MULTIPLE PRINT ATTRIBUTES IN ONE COMMAND FOR EXAMPLE TARTSD S DOUBLE HTGH SINGLE SPACED THIS SHOULD BE BACK TO NORMAL DOUBI 147 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Select Font Print Mode ASCII Code ESC I n Hex Code 1B49n Dec Code 2773n Purpose Selects the print mode where n can take the following values Table 34 Select Font Print Mode n Hex Letter Gothic DP 00 Ignored 01 Courier
130. ance it is ignored Settings in proportional mode are treated as 10 cpi Set Forms Length by Lines ASCII Code ESC C n Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment 1B43n 2767n Sets the form length by lines n 1 through 192 hex 01 through hex CO to specify the number of lines per form at the current line spacing The forms length is set to the number of lines defined by the quotient of n divided by the current lines per inch so that the units are in inches The current line becomes the first line of the form The forms length is always defined in inches therefore changing the Ipi after this control code has been issued does not change the forms length If the calculated forms length in lines is not an exact multiple of the target machine dot size the forms length value is adjusted down to the next possible multiple When forms length is set by an ESC C sequence the skip over perforation set by ESC N is cancelled 197 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Set Forms Length in Inches ASCII Code ESC C NUL n Hex Code 1B4300n Dec Code 27670n Purpose Sets the form length to n inches where n 1 through 24 hex 01 through hex 18 to specify the number of inches on a form Comment Upon receipt of this code the current line becomes the first line of the form and the form length set becomes the current forms length Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of the form
131. and The forms length is set to the number of lines defined by the quotient of n and the current line spacing so that the units are in inches The forms length set by n becomes the current forms length If the calculated forms length in lines is not an exact multiple of the target machine dot size the forms length value is adjusted down to the next possible multiple When forms length is changed by the ESC C sequence the bottom margin is set to zero The current paper position becomes top of form If the form length is set smaller than the line spacing a line feed moves the current line spacing a form feed advances paper position to the next top of form position Forms length can also be set through the control panel The control code forms length setting from the host computer overrides the control panel setting Horizontal Tab ASCII Code HT Hex Code 09 Dec Code 9 Purpose Moves the logical printhead right to the next horizontal tab stop Comment Power on default horizontal tabs are set at every eighth character If there are no horizontal tabs set or the logical printhead is located at the last character column the code is ignored and no movement occurs Horizontal tabs are stored as a relative position therefore character pitch changes change horizontal tab positions See the Horizontal Tab Set control code section to set new tab positions 135 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Con
132. aracters or spaces already loaded in the print buffer The space character hex 20 is used to skip characters in the print buffer that are not to be replaced and similar to underlining or deleting the new characters are inserted in the appropriate positions Table 14 illustrates the edit mode Note that the editing function replaces characters it cannot be used to print the same character twice double strike in the same location Use the DEL code hex 7F to make a character blank NOTE In order for edit mode to work correctly the protocol must be configured for a carriage return only If configured for a carriage return and a line feed the contents of the buffer are printed upon receipt of the CR code disabling the editing function NUL Code Table 14 CR Edit Mode Example Enter in Print Buffer Printed Result Example 1 AAABBBCCC CR AAABDBCCB SSSSDSSSB LF Example 2 ABCDEF CR ABCDEF R Key S Space hex 20 LF Line Feed hex OA CR Carriage Return hex OD NUL Code NUL hex 00 is ignored by the printer and can be used as a fill character however it can not be used to add blank spaces since it is not a space character Control Code Index The following index lists the control codes by function and lists the ASCII mnemonic and page number FUNCTION ASCII CODE PAGE Paper Motion Form Feed FF 70 Line Feed LF 71 Vertical Tab VT 75 Print Attributes Plot Even Dot EOT 72 Plot Odd Dot
133. at are included in hex codes 00 through 1F and 80 through 9F are usually not printable in the default state on Epson printers Sending ESC 1 enables you to print characters in this range Sending ESC I 0 returns the codes to non printable status The printable codes for the Epson character set are shown in Table 40 The mapping of 00 through 1F and 80 through 9F are the same in this case Table 40 shows the types of characters and their addresses it is not a sample of printer output 175 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Table 40 Epson Printable Codes Hex 00 1F and 80 9F BITS B4 B3 B2 B1 B7 B6 B5 OCTAL DECIMAL HEX Og N C a 99 C DC4 oO Co Che ov ww wjn nj jooo E Mr 0101 5 Pepp ap ap aa lt bb BS gt Z HT o co 1 o o 5 x o o o o Q Ct gt Ki Epson USA Character Set IBM 437 Code Page Form Feed Form Feed ASCII Code FF Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment oc 12 Prints the data in the buffer if any then moves the paper to the top of the next form The logical print head moves to the left margin This code cancels all one line only emphasis and font controls double wide from SO and ESC SO and unidirectional printing from ESC Graphics Standard Density ASCII Code ESC K n1 n2 Hex Code Dec Code
134. b positions set below the bottom of the form are ignored Forms length is defined in inches therefore subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command The maximum forms length is 24 inches All other values are ignored When forms length is set by the ESC C NUL sequence the skip over perforation is set to zero Forms length can also be set through the control panel The control code forms length setting from the host computer overrides the control panel setting Forms Length Set Lines ASCII Code ESC C n Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment 1B43n 2767n Sets the length of a form paper in lines n 1 through 192 hex 01 through CO to specify the number of lines per page at the current line spacing The forms length set becomes the current forms length The forms length units are always defined in inches therefore subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command Changing Ipi does not change the forms length The forms length is set to the number of lines defined by the quotient of n and the current line spacing so that the units are in inches If the calculated forms length in lines is not an exact multiple of the target machine dot size the forms length value is adjusted down to the next possible multiple When forms length is set by the ESC C sequence the skip over perforation is set to zero 101 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulatio
135. bytes a Line Terminator hex OA or hex OC Control Code hex 05 plot data bytes and a Line Terminator The control sequence for sending P Series Double Density Plot is 1 Send the even dot plot control code EOT hex 04 followed by plot data bytes Senda line terminator which causes the emulation to plot the data bytes the paper position is not advanced in Double Density Plot the emulation now waits for the second plot command and plot data bytes Send the odd dot plot control code ENQ 05 hex and a second line of data followed by a line terminator a Aline feed OA hex used as the line terminator plots the contents of the buffer and advances the paper position a single dot row based on the vertical density of the current mode A CR if CR CR LF is configured may also be used with the same result b Aform feed 0C hex used as the line terminator plots the data bytes and advances the paper position to the next TOF Regardless of which line terminator code is sent the emulation defaults to the previously selected print mode unless further plot control codes are provided with the data 281 Chapter 282 8 P Series Compatible Plot Mode Odd Even Dot Plotting Plotting the Data P Series Plot Mode plots the image from the horizontal bit pattern Figure 34 duplicates the pattern shown in Figure 29 but is modified for Odd Dot Plot Eight dot rows are required two characters per row six columns per character i
136. coe 1 I ar 199 Tooorro 4 oa or oon omcooo AIS ocr foor ere 9 9r sr 050 oooorro 3 Po apres ior T oosese o far or uror eosese 7 3 z 9 roro 7 s e v as fonos onon coseso N far sc rr orno oseso faz 950 omon 7 E 3 wr as eor ssr roriorr cose X Jor Zz str onor oweoe fae sso rorioro E Oe mmm P PT vo poorest orororr co080 T t rc err ororoor O80 ve c c9 vrororo E 1 Te sorprer rooror oo 1 er ex irr 101r oco C 5 ir 199 ooroo 7 q POT OST 00010TI H sr cz Orr 0001001 eco Sz SO 0001010 o QOScCO a ojo cer on S cose o fa tz cor rrr eee I s RIES g iojo onon oeeo a for or or orror coweo 9c s 979 onoono F 5 s os roroor ooo a fer feo sor roro ecotoe sc ce RUSS d BREUER EE EIERE ENEE coo s c w Pro vorooro e 5 sp 66 err rrooorr accose 5 fer 29 tor 00r cose ec se er ooo 7 Dae s enr orooorr concen sr c 9 cor oror eooo re ero vrovoro 3 i9 ps rer Toon oobooe eler Tor T0991 coe 3 Tc re 179 T609010 OPO 0000010 Oj NTN D scher o efor rs oor foor f eo fs IL6LSET AMVNIG IL6LSET IT6LSET AMVNIG cIlorgovc ZIOL 8947 TIOL 8977 Appendix D 312 E Glossary Active column Active position ASCII Baud Bold Buffer A The horizonta
137. control panel line spacing setting and the message display reflects the line spacing as 10 3 lines per inch Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript overlapping lines may occur Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap Example The following example illustrates 7 72 inch line spacing m TREE ROAA SUBSEQUENT ME YES sei ecco 50 Line Spacing n 72 Inch Line Spacing n 72 Inch ASCII Code SFCC A n Hex Code SFCC 41n Dec Code SFCC65n Purpose Stores a line spacing of n 72 inch increments where n 1 through 85 hex 01 through hex 55 all others are ignored Comment When the SFCC A control sequence is received all line feed commands following an SFCC 2 sequence are at n 72 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting Small values of n may result in overlapping lines Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript characters are used on the same line Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap Example The following example illustrates 20 72 inch line spacing The SFCC 2 sequence page 48 asserts the line spacing that was stored by the preceding SFCC A sequence CONTROL CODE ESC
138. cpi compressed 20 12 to 20 3 n a n a n a 2 Form feed at TOF Enable Ignore 1 Print Width 13 2 inches 8 inches 0 Sheet feeder n a n a Line Feed ASCII Code LF Hex Code 0A Dec Code 10 Purpose Prints the data in the buffer if any and advances the vertical character position one line at the current line space setting Comment If configured for LF equals new line LFZCR LF the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 of the new line Otherwise the logical print head does not move when configured for LF function only LFZLF ONLY The LF function cancels all single line print attributes such as double high elongated and double wide expanded characters 139 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Line Feed n 216 Inch One Line Only ASCII Code ESC Jn Hex Code 1B4An Dec Code 2774n Purpose Advances the vertical character position n 216 inch for one line only where n 1 through 255 hex 01 through hex FF Comment The n 216 inch line feed control code is effective for one line only All single line only print attributes are canceled If the emulation is configured for LF equals newline LF CR LF the paper advances one line at the current line space setting and the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 The paper position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing
139. ct Shift Out Alternate Character Set Select Shift Out ASCII Code SO BS Hex Code OE 08 Dec Code 14 8 NOTE An alternate hex code of 08 ASCII code BS can be assigned as the Alternate Character Set Select control code through printer configuration Purpose Accesses the extended character set in the range of hex AO through FF using codes hex 20 through 7F Comment These codes are used in 7 bit systems as if data bit 8 was set to 1 For example sending code hex 20 accesses the symbol at code point hex AO If a printable symbol is not available at the code point a space is printed Both commands are cancelled by a paper motion command Refer to the character set charts in Appendix D Example HUES EIE E82 E tel bE per ped Wp ba phate p ELO EIER Ee iL b4 pdt p bp t4 L ELE E ka HeH p g t 4 4SELECTS THE PRIMARY CHARACTER SET Carriage Return ASCII Code CR Hex Code OD Dec Code 13 Purpose Positions the logical print head at the left margin resets the memory pointer to the first character position Comment The printer can be configured to perform a carriage return only CR CR only or a carriage return plus a line feed function CR CR LF A CR CR configuration enables underline add delete and edit functions but the host computer must send a separate line feed code to print the data and change the vertical position The character position indicator is positioned at character column one S
140. cter printing CONTROL CODE ESC w 1 SELECTS DOUBLE HIGH PRINTING ESC w 0 CANCELS DOUBLE HIGH PRINTING 40 Emphasized Print Emphasized Print ASCII Code SFCC E Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example SFCC 45 SFCC 69 Selects emphasized character print format When the emphasized print control code is received all characters are printed in emphasized print until reset by the emphasized print reset control code or printer reset Emphasized print is ignored during superscript or subscript printing and when 15 20 cpi characters have been selected The following sample illustrates emphasized character printing CONTROL CODE ESC E SELECTS EMPHASIZED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE ESC F CANCELS EMPHASIZED CHARACTER PRINTING Emphasized Print Reset ASCII Code SFCC F Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example SFCC 46 SFCC 70 Resets emphasized character printing The emphasized print reset control code only resets the emphasized print character attribute See the Emphasized Print control code example above for an example of Emphasized Print Reset 41 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Emulation Reset ASCII Code SFCC o Hex Code SFCC 40 Dec Code SFCC 64 Purpose Initializes all print mode related parameters to their power up configuration values Comment Print mode line spacing international language selection margins form length skip
141. d as any character or command that might cause the head of a serial printer to move away from character column one Plot Density Plot density refers to the number of dots per inch dpi printed in a single dot row The dots are plot dots not target machine dots measuring 1 60 inch horizontally and vertically Two types of plot density are available with P Series Plot mode graphics normal density and high density The densities can be mixed within the printed page on a dot row by row basis but the two densities cannot be mixed on the same dot row Normal density plotting is selected with the odd dot plot control code ENQ hex 05 The odd numbered dot columns are addressed to produce a vertical density that varies based on the font selected 72 dpi vertical for Letter Gothic DP and 144 dpi vertical for Courier NLQ Figure 31 illustrates normal density dot plot Figure 31 Normal Density Plot 278 Plot Data Byte Format High density plotting is selected with the even dot plot control code EOT hex 04 in conjunction with the odd dot plot control code ENQ hex 05 The odd and even numbered dot columns are addressed to double the horizontal density The vertical density remains the same in normal and high density plotting though vertical density is based on the current print mode Figure 32 illustrates high density plotting Figure 32 High Density Plot Plot Data Byte Format In P Series Plot Mode the for
142. d dot columns for normal density plotting Comment The Odd Dot Plot control code can occur anywhere in the data line before the line terminator It defines certain data between the next and last paper motion commands as odd dot plot data These data are plotted at 60 by 72 dots per inch When this mode is exited the print mode and attributes last selected remain active A detailed description of plotting can be found in Chapter 8 Graphics This command can occur anywhere in the datastream and is acted upon immediately affecting the entire current print line Example CONTROL CODE 05 HEX SELECTS ODD DOT PLOT USING QQQQQQQQQQ AS THE DATA RESULTS IN THE FOLLOWING DOT PATTERN Select Letter Gothic DP ASCII Code STX ETX HT Hex Code 02 03 09 Dec Code 2 3 9 Purpose Selects Letter Gothic DP print mode NOTE Configure this feature using the control panel Comment Any of the three codes select Letter Gothic DP print mode Both ETX and HT also select 17 1 cpi if you configure the printer from the control panel see page 68 These commands can occur anywhere in the datastream and are acted upon immediately affecting the entire current print line 73 Chapter 3 Configuring the XQ Emulation with Control Codes Example CONTROL CODE 02 SELECTS LETTER GOTHIC PRINT MODE FOR ONE LINE ONLY JUST EXITED LETTER GOTHIC MODE BY EXECUTING AN LF Space ASCII Code SP Hex Code 20 Dec Code 32 Purpose Produces a
143. d double density ESC Y 60 120 3 Quadruple density ESC Z 120 24012 4 CRTI none 80 160 5 Plotter 1 1 none 72 144 6 CRT Il none 90 180 7 Double density plotter none 144 144 Data can be sent incorrectly In these modes no dots can be closer horizontally than the current font dot density Sending incorrect data does not damage the printer 2 240 dpi is simulated by combining the dots from two adjacent columns into one 120 dpi dot column Number of horizontal dots per inch the printer can make Number of dot columns available 192 Select Italic Character Set Select Italic Character Set ASCII Code ESCt n Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment 1B74n 27 116n Selects the italics characters from hex 80 through hex FF or selects the graphics characters from hex 80 through hex FF n hex 1 selects the graphics character set n hex 0 selects the italics character set The graphics character set is the IBM Graphics Code Page 437 ESC t n SELECTS EITHER THE ITALIC OR GRAPHIC CHARACTER SET THIS SHOULD BE IN ITALICS bb paw IL eji 8 PS t tu Select 9 Pin Graphics Mode ASCII Code ESC m n1 n2 1 dk Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 1B 5E m n1 n2d1 dk 27 94 m n1 n2d1 dk Turns on 9 pin bit image graphics mode m defines the plot density as shown in Table 43 on page 192 n1 256n2 The total number of columns This mode requires two bytes of graphic data for every column of pr
144. d in Chapter 4 Serial Matrix Printer Protocol in Chapter 5 IBM Proprinter III XL Printer Protocol and in Chapter 6 Epson FX 1050 Printer Protocol Executing Vertical Tabs Executing Vertical Tabs The vertical tab execute code is VT When sent it prints the contents of the print buffer if data is in the buffer and causes paper position movement to the next predefined vertical tab position If a tab position is not defined the paper position is moved to the next line at the current line spacing If a tab position is at the current line the paper position is moved to the next tab position If no tab positions are defined between the current line and the end of the form the paper position moves to the next TOF Vertical Tab Positions Vertical tab positions are set by line number A maximum of 16 vertical tab positions can be set per channel of the form If the single channel format is used a maximum of 16 vertical tabs can be set for the form A sample single channel format is shown in Figure 37 The first vertical tab is set at line 6 for part number data a second tab is set at line 8 for part name data and a third tab is set at line 14 for quantity data Since this is a single channel format or channel 0 the ESC B code can be used to assign the vertical tabs to the lines of the form Once the tab positions are set sending the vertical tab execute code VT causes the paper position currently at the top of f
145. data bytes to 0 Epson FX 1050 Emulation 168 Clear EVFU memory P Series EVFU 290 Clip Page Print engine options 217 Codabar Bar Code 234 Code 128 Bar Code 240 Code 39 Bar Code 236 Code 93 Bar Code 238 Combining graphics and text 283 Command line P Series Emulation 25 Commands PTR_Setup 297 Super Set Programming 205 Compressed Print P Series XQ Emulation 68 Condensed Print Epson FX 1050 Emulation 168 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 130 Serial Matrix Emulation 94 Condensed Print Reset Epson FX 1050 Emulation 169 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 130 Serial Matrix Emulation 94 CONFIG command summary PTR_Setup 302 Configuration printer 19 Contact information 323 Control Code Descriptions Epson FX 1050 Emulation 158 P Series Emulation 24 P Series XQ Emulation 64 Serial Matrix Emulation 80 Control Code Index Epson FX 1050 Emulation 161 IBM Proprinter Ill XL Emulation 121 P Series XQ Emulation 65 Serial Matrix Emulation 81 Control code reference index P Series Emulation 26 Control Codes Epson FX 1050 Emulation 158 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 120 P Series Emulation 24 Serial Matrix Emulation 80 Customer Support Center 323 Cut sheet paper Feed Control Epson FX 1050 Emulation 169 D Data plotting Graphics 282 Default Settings IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation 118 Default Values Epson FX 1050 Emulation 154 P Series Emulation 22 P Series XQ Emulation 62 Serial Matrix E
146. e Symbols ASCII Code SFCC 6 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment SFCC 36 SFCC 54 Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 through 9F are printable symbols This feature is also selectable from the control panel see the Alternate Set 80 9F parameter in the configuration chapter of your User s Manual 33 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Character Set Select ECMA 94 Latin 1 Extended ASCII Code SFCC OSET n Purpose Selects the Extended Character Set and the print mode and pitch at which the extended character prints Valid only in the ECMA 94 Latin 1 Extended Character Set otherwise this command is ignored Comment nranges from 0 through 12 hex 00 through hex OB to select the print mode pitch combinations available from page 54 All other values result in an error message In OSET mode values outside the range in Table 6 produce an error message Command Line Error Messages are listed in Table 2 on page 25 Extended characters print at the print mode and pitch selected by the OSET command even if that mode and pitch differs from the currently selected print mode and pitch If the print mode differs between the extended and primary characters the first character in the data stream selects the print mode at which that line prints Different pitches can be printed on the same line Table 6 Print Modes Pitches Available Using P Series OSET ECMA Latin 1 Extended Char
147. e briefly introduced in the chapters of this book that describe the control codes for each of the emulations listed above In the following subsections the generic code sequence name SSCC is placed before the control code to remind you to enter the correct sequence depending on the printer protocol currently active 205 Chapter 7 TheSuper Set Commands Character Set Selection ASCII Code SSCC Rn Hex Code SSCC 52n Dec Code SSCC 82n Purpose Selects one of several character sets Table 45 Epson FX Character Sets n Character Set n Character Set n Character Set 000 IBM Code Page 437 206 7 Bit Cyrillic 403 ABY Greek 001 Epson 207 Ukrainian 404 ABG Greek 002 OCR A 208 Bulgarian 405 ELOT 927 Greek 003 OCR B 209 Win CP 1251 406 Greek 851 004 Multinational 300 Latin 2 8859 2 407 Greek 437 005 IBM Code Page 850 301 Code Page 852 408 Greek 8859 7 006 CP 858 EURO 302 Mazovia 409 Win CP 1253 100 ASMO 449 303 Kamenicky 410 Greek 813 EURO 101 ASMO 449 304 Roman 8 411 EURO 869 EURO 102 ASMO 708 305 PC 437 Slavic 500 Hebrew Old 103 ASMO 708 306 Slavic 1250 501 Hebrew New 104 MS DOS CP710 307 Code Page 865 502 Hebrew DEC 105 MS DOS CP720 308 Code Page 860 503 Latin 1 Hebrew 106 Sakr CP714 309 Latin 1 8859 1 504 Win CP 1255 107 Aptec CP715 310 Latin 5 8859 9 600 Data Gen Turk 108 CP 786 311 Latin 9 8859 15 601 DEC Turkish 109 IBM CP864 312 Polish POL1 602 IBM Turkish 110 IBM CP1046 313 Win CP 1250 603 Siemens Turkish 111 Ar
148. e form and the form length set becomes the current forms length Vertical tab positions set below the bottom of the form are ignored Forms length is defined in inches therefore subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command The maximum forms length is 21 inches All larger values are ignored When forms length is changed by the ESC C NUL sequence the bottom margin is set to zero If the product of lines and line spacing forms length is not an exact multiple of the printer dot resolution the value is adjusted down until forms length and dot resolution distance match The current paper position becomes top of form If the form length is set smaller than the line spacing a line feed moves the current line spacing a form feed advances paper position to the next top of form position Forms length can also be set through the control panel The control code forms length setting from the host computer overrides the control panel setting 134 Forms Length Set Lines Forms Length Set Lines ASCII Code ESC C n Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment 1B43n 2767n Sets the length of a form paper in lines n 1 through 192 hex 01 through hex CO to specify the number of lines per page at the current line spacing The forms length set becomes the current forms length Forms length is defined in inches therefore subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this comm
149. e graphics data contain horizontally adjacent dots the data may print incorrectly This feature is widely used to move the print head precisely by printing blank dot columns The following example produces a double density double speed graphic image of the pattern used in the standard density example The amount of data must be doubled for double density the data are used 54 times rather than 27 DOUBLE DENSITY DOUBLE SPEED BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS NAAN 179 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Graphics Quadruple Density ASCII Code ESC Z n1 n2 Hex Code 1B 5A n1 n2 Dec Code 27 90 n1 n2 Purpose Selects Quadruple Density Bit Image graphics of 240 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically where n1 256n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required DATA consist of 8 bit dot columns with the MSB at the top and 1 bits producing dots For more information refer to Chapter 8 Graphics Comment This mode is similar to ESC L except that four dot columns are printed in the space normally taken by two columns You can change graphics density with the ESC command Example The following example produces quadruple density graphics of t
150. e preceding seventeen data bytes Counting the two zeros of the application identifier the mod 10 check digit is the twentieth byte in the data field Al 01 called the Shipping Container Code or SCC 14 takes 14 additional numerical data bytes The last data byte is a mod 10 check digit on the preceding 13 data bytes Counting the zero and the one of the application identifier the mod 10 check digit is the sixteenth byte in the data field The modulo 10 data field check digit for both SSCC 18 and SCC 14 is printed in the bar code as the second half of the last number pair using subset C It is displayed in the human readable data field as the twentieth byte for SSCC 18 or the sixteenth byte for SCC 14 ASCII Emulation automatically calculates the modulo 10 check digit for SSCC 18 if only 17 data digits are provided following the application identifier of 00 UPC A The UPC A bar code structure is shown in Figure 22 and described below SR SC START CODE CENTER CODE POSITION wa GES Ne SIOREODE NT we T LEFT DATA RIGHT DATA ouer FIELD FIELD ZONE NI NUMBER Ll SYSTEM ET LN m ua T Vm odis a ee e bcc CHARACTER QUIET ZONE i CHECK DIGIT CH NUMBER SYSTEM OPTIONAL READABLE EC DIGIT FIELD CHARACTER CHARACTER FIELD DATA FIELD Figure 22 UPC A Structure Quiet Zone Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin and end in a blank area You are responsible for providing sufficient sp
151. e the character set charts in Appendix D for the printable symbols 129 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Condensed Print ASCII Code SI ESC SI Hex Code OF 1B OF Dec Code 15 27 15 Purpose Sets condensed print where If the emulation is set at 5 cpi it is changed to 8 55 cpi If the emulation is set at 10 cpi it is changed to 17 1 cpi If the emulation is set at 12 cpi itis changed to 20 cpi if 20 cpi is enabled Comment The Proprinter XL condensed print control code SI affects all subsequent characters After receiving code SI all characters are printed in condensed print until reset by control code DC2 printer reset or a new print mode control code Example The following sample illustrates condensed character printing and reset CONTROL CODE SI SELECTS CONDENSED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE DC2 RESETS CONDENSED CHARACTER PRINTING Condensed Print Reset ASCII Code DC2 ESC DC 2 Hex Code 12 1B 12 Dec Code 18 27 18 Purpose Cancels condensed print where If the emulation is set at 6 or 8 55 cpi it is set to 5 cpi If the emulation is set at 12 17 1 20 cpi it is set to 10 cpi Comment A new print mode control code cancels condensed print Example See the Condensed Print control code section for an example of Condensed Print Reset 130 Deselect Printer Deselect Printer ASCII Code ESC Q 22 Hex Code 1B 5116 Dec Code 27 81 22 Purpose Stops
152. each numeric field for overlay using the Printronix number QQQ represents a decimal value between 0 and 255 which identifies the number of entries in the substitution table No leading zeros are required for entries of one and two digits Each entry consists of AAA representing the decimal value between 0 and 255 These digits identify the address code that causes the substituted character to print No leading zeros are required for entries of one and two digits SSSSS representing the decimal value between 0 and 65535 These digits identify the symbol code point in the Multinational Character Set No leading zeros are required for entries containing less than five digits Any symbol in the Character Library in Appendix C can be substituted into any printable symbol code print The character set overlay is valid only for the current base character set You must reload the character set overlay after a new character set is selected After switching from NON OCR typeface to OCR typeface or vice versa you must reload the character set overlay to print the correct characters Any symbol in the Character Library in Appendix C can be substituted into any printable symbol code point If AAA is the same value as a control character the control character takes precedence and printing of that value does not occur If the Space hex 20 is substituted unexpected results may occur including decreased print speed Once defined and downlo
153. eature from the control panel Purpose Selects elongated double high character printing for one line Comment The Elongated Character control code can be placed anywhere in the data line before the line terminator Following the line terminator the printer automatically selects the default print mode Consequently the Elongated Character control code must be sent for each line of elongated characters Elongated characters cannot be mixed with standard characters on the same print line The current line spacing is doubled for one line This code can occur anywhere in the datastream and is acted upon immediately It is cancelled by an SI code or a paper motion command Example CONTROL CODE 08 HEX SELECTS ELONGATED CHARACTER PRINTING FOR ONE LINE AND THEN THE DEFAULT PRINT MODE IS RESELECTED AUTOMATICALLY Form Feed ASCII Code FF Hex Code OC Dec Code 12 Purpose Prints the data in the buffer advances the paper position to the next top of form and moves the logical printhead to the first character column Comment The default forms length is determined by the configuration in nonvolatile memory Forms length is set by using the control panel or VFU Code FF cancels all single line only print attributes The Form Feed command reacts differently when the VFU is active See Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting 70 Line Feed Line Feed ASCII Code LF Hex Code 0A Dec Code 10 Purpose Prints the data
154. ecimal 7th Bit Image Data Byte Weights 73 H 36 73 Decimal 146 255 146 Values Figure 29 Bit Image Pattern Plan A bit image pattern is easily defined by determining the decimal equivalent of the binary data byte This decimal value may then be included in a program data statement that generates the final Bit Image pattern To determine the decimal value of a data byte the decimal weights for each dot are added together For the seven bytes shown in Figure 29 the decimal values are computed as shown in Table 77 Table 77 Example Bit Image Pattern Decimal Values Bit Image Dat Byte Decimal Weight Decimal Value 13 byte 64 4 8 1 73 2 byte 128 16 2 146 3 d byte 3244 96 A byte 1284644 32416 8 24 42 1 255 5th byte 32 4 36 6t byte 128 4 16 4 2 146 7 byte 64 841 73 274 Bit Image Density Bit Image Density Bit Image Graphics mode may be printed in different dot densities selected by the following control codes e ESC K selects the Single Density mode e ESC L selects the Double Density mode e ESC Y selects the Double Speed Double Density mode e ESC Z selects the Quad Density mode Bit Image Graphics mode was originally intended to be used on printers having 60 dpi or 120 dpi horizontal resolution and 72 dpi vertical resolution Other print modes can be used but the horizontal and or vertical dimension might change and or overlaps or ga
155. ect must be set to Enable Refer to the User s Manual for information about this menu option This control code allows the printer to receive and print data from the host if it was deselected by DC3 If the printer was not deselected by DC3 this code is ignored Reassign Graphics Mode ASCII Code ESC s m Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment 1B3F sm 2763sm Changes one graphics mode to another S is a character K L Y or Z which causes graphics mode to change to mode m 0 7 see Table 43 on page 192 Sending data to the bit image command makes the data print according to the graphics mode you select with m 191 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Remove Downloaded Characters ASCII Code ESC NUL n NUL Hex Code 1B 3A 00 n00 Dec Code 27580n0 Purpose Erases all downloaded characters TComment The printer ignores this command but removes all data sent Select Graphics Mode ASCII Code ESC m n1 n2 Hex Code 1B2Amn1in2 Dec Code 2742mn1n2 Purpose Turns on 8 pin bit image graphics mode m Table 43 charts the graphics modes available Comment The total number of columns n1 256n2 NOTE This command does not suppress hexadecimal FF from printing Table 43 Epson Graphics Modes m Onton Alternate Density Resolution P Code dots per inch dots per inch 0 Single density ESC K 60 120 1 Double density ESC L 120 120 2 High spee
156. ent dot row spacing the remainder is added to the next paper motion command Small values of n may result in overlapping lines Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript characters are used on the same line Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap Example The following example illustrates n 216 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC J 200 PERFORMS A 200 216 INCH LINE FEED FUNCTION FOR ONE LINE ONLY 104 Line Spacing 1 6 Inch Line Spacing 1 6 Inch ASCII Code ESC 2 ESCAn Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example 1B32 1B41n 2750 2765n ESC 2 sets line spacing to 6 Ipi or as set by ESC A The value of n should be 12 if using ESC A n ESC 2 asserts n 72 inch line spacing as set by ESC A page 106 If no distance has been set by ESC A the distance is 1 6 inch The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting The following example illustrates 1 6 inch line spacing and assumes that a distance has not been set by ESC A CONTROL CODE ESC 2 SETS LINE SPACING AT 6 LPI FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi ASCII Code ESCO ESCAn Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example 1B30 2741n 2748 2765n Specifies continuous line spacing at 1 8 inch increments 8 Ipi When the 1 8 inch line spacing contr
157. er Content Format Al 8003 UPC EAN Number and Serial Number Or Returnable Asset n4 n14 an 16 8004 UCC EAN Serial Identification n4 an 30 8005 Identifies the Price Per Unit of Measure n4 n6 8006 Component of an Article n4 n144 n2 n2 8018 Service Relation Number n4 n18 8100 Coupon Extended Code Number System Character and Offer n4 n1 n5 8101 Coupon Extended Code Number System Character Offer and End of n4 n1 n5 n Offer 4 8102 Coupon Extended Code Number System Characte Preceded by Zero n4 n1 n1 90 Mutually Agreed Between Trading Partners n2 an 30 91 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 92 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 93 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 94 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 95 Internal Carriers n2 an 30 96 Internal Carriers n2 an 30 97 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 98 Intra Company Internal n2 an 30 99 Internal n2 an 30 Toindicate only year and month DD must be filled with 00 Plus one digit for length indication Plus one digit for decimal point indication Data Value Representation a alphabetic characters n numeric characters an alpha numeric characters n3 Snumeric characters fixed length an 3 up to 3 alpha numeric n 3 up to 3 numeric characters characters 261 Chapter 262 7 Bar Codes Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate
158. er III XL Printer Protocol Introduction This chapter describes the Proprinter IIl XL emulation host control codes Emulation refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language A printer control language is the coding system used to convey manipulate and print data It contains character codes and command sequences that configure the emulation In the Proprinter IIl XL emulation mode your printer can print files coded for the Proprinter III XL printer control language To select the Proprinter emulation as the active printer emulation select Proprinter IIl XL from the Printer Control menu as described in the User s Manual The Proprinter III XL emulation provides many configurable parameters The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 26 You can modify these parameter values in two ways The Proprinter IIl XL host control codes An extensive set of Proprinter III XL control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the Proprinter IIl XL control code commands e The printer configuration menus You can modify a subset of the Proprinter III XL emulation parameters using the printer configuration menus control panel keys and LCD as described in the User s Manual Control codes sent from a host system generally override previous settings that result fro
159. es 2 Binary ASCII Plus mode This offers encodation for all ASCII characters printable or not and binary values 3 Numeric Compaction mode This offers encodation for numeric values to a density of almost 3 digits per code word ASCII Emulation will automatically switch between modes to provide the smallest encodation for the data 253 Chapter 254 7 Bar Codes Security Level PDF417 can detect and correct errors Each label has 2 code words of error detection You can select the error correction capacity based on application needs Specify a security level in the range of 0 8 at the time of printing PDF417 can also recover from omissions and misdecodes of code words Since it requires two code words to recover from a misdecode one to detect the error and one to correct for it a given security level can support half the number of misdecodes that it can of undecoded words PDF Print Data Field is not offered due to the large amount of data that can be encoded PostBar and Royal Mail PostBar and Royal Mail bar codes like POSTNET are used for mailing applications However these bar codes can encode full addresses on labels These bar codes are similar to POSTNET in terms of bar space and width but have four different types of bars Full Height Ascender Descender and Tracker whereas POSTNET only has two bar types Tall and Short The Royal Mail symbology converts alphanumeric characters into patterns
160. eset by ESC M ESC P DC2 a printer reset or a new print mode control code SI code hex OF is equivalent to the ESC SI code If condensed print is not allowed in the current font this code is ignored Proportionally spaced text cannot be condensed Proportional spacing overrides condensed printing When condensed print is selected the following character pitches become effective e 10 cpi condenses to 17 1 cpi 10 12 and 15 cpi condense to 17 1 cpi e 12 and 15 cpi condense to 20 t This control code condenses character width but not inter character spacing An actual Epson FX 1050 printer condenses both character width and spacing If Condensed Print is combined with Double High ESC w printing only Double High printing occurs Example This sample shows condensed character printing and reset CONTROL CODE SI SELECTS CONDENSED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE DC2 RESETS CONDENSED CHARACTER PRINTING 168 Condensed Print Reset Condensed Print Reset ASCII Code DC2 Hex Code 12 Dec Code 18 Purpose Cancels the condensed print mode set by SI ESC SI or the operator panel Comment This returns the printer to the font that was active before condensed print occurred Other print attributes are not affected Example See the Condensed Print control code page 168 for an example of Condensed Print Reset Cut Sheet Paper Feed Control ASCII Code ESC EM n Hex Code 1B19n Dec Code 2725n Purpose This code con
161. eset control code or printer reset Emphasized print is ignored in the superscript subscript print mode Both superscript and subscript characters can be printed in the same character column using the Backspace BS control code page 83 Caution should be used when combining Superscript or Subscript printing with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High or small line spacing overlapping lines may occur Characters with different horizontal or vertical dot densities do not overlap The following sample illustrates superscript subscript printing CONTROL CODE ESC S O SELECTS SYPERSCRIPT A2 B2 C2 CONTROL CODE ESC S 1 SELECTScusscriptr 31yex 49pec CONTROL CODE ESC T CANCELS SUPERSCRIPT SUBSCRIPT PRINTING 113 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Superscript Subscript Printing Reset ASCII Code ESC T Hex Code 1B54 Dec Code 2784 Purpose Resets superscript and subscript printing as set by ESC S Super Set Commands ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B7C 7D 3B Dec Code 27 124 125 59 Purpose Control code sequence used to introduce the super set commands Comment Super set commands affect the ASCII Emulation as a whole regardless of the printer protocol currently active The commands are sent from the host in the data stream to the printer and provide the following capabilities e Select a printer protocol e Change the page orientation e Define various font attributes
162. ess Height or 3rd Dimension Feet n4 n6 329 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Yards n4 n6 330 Gross Weight Kilograms n4 n6 331 Length or ist Dimension Logistics n4 n6 332 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Meters Logistics n4 n6 333 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Meters Logistics n4 n6 334 Area Square Meters Logistics n4 n6 335 Gross Volume Liters n4 n6 336 Gross Volume Cubic Meters n4 n6 259 Chapter 7 Bar Codes Table 74 UCC EAN 128 Application Identifiers continued Application Identifier Content Format Al 337 Kilograms Per Square Meter n4 n6 340 Gross Weight Pounds n4 n6 341 Length Or 1st Dimension Inches Logistics n4 n6 342 Length Or 1st Dimension Feet Logistics n4 n6 343 Length Or 1st Dimension Yards Logistics n4 n6 344 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Inches Logistics n4 n6 345 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Feet Logistics n4 n6 346 Width Diameter or 2nd Dimension Yards Logistics n4 n6 347 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Inches Logistics n4 n6 348 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Feet Logistics n4 n6 349 Depth Thickness Height or 3rd Dimension Yards Logistics n4 n6 350 Area Square Inches n4 n6 351 Area Square Fe
163. et n4 n6 352 Area Square Yards n4 n6 353 Area Square Inches Logistics n4 n6 354 Area Square Feet Logistics n4 n6 355 Area Square Yards Logistics n4 n6 356 Net Weight Troy Ounce n4 n6 357 Net Volume Ounces n4 n6 360 Volume Quarts n4 n6 361 Volume Gallons n4 n6 362 Gross Volume Quarts n4 n6 363 Gross Volume Gallons n4 n6 364 Volume Cubic Inches n4 n6 365 Volume Cubic Feet n4 n6 366 Volume Cubic Yards n4 n6 367 Gross Volume Cubic Inches n4 n6 368 Gross Volume Cubic Inches n4 n6 369 Gross Volume Cubic Inches n4 n6 37 Quantity of Units Contained For Use With Al 02 Only n2 n 8 400 Customer s Purchase Order Number n3 an 30 401 Consignment Number n3 an 30 410 Ship To Deliver To Location Code Using EAN 13 n3 n13 411 Bill To Invoice To Location Code Using EAN 13 n3 n13 412 Purchase From Location Code of Party From Whom Goods Are n3 n13 Purchased 413 Ship For UCC EAN Location Code n3 n13 414 EAN Location Code For Physical Identification n3 n13 420 Ship To Deliver To Postal Code Within a Single Postal Authority n3 an 20 421 Ship To Deliver To Postal Code With 3 Digit ISO Country Code Prefix n3 n3 an 9 8001 Roll Products Width Length Core Diameter Direction and Splices n4 n14 260 Table 74 UCC EAN 128 Application Identifiers continued UCC EAN 128 Application Identifi
164. ex 1E when the PI signal line is disabled low or hex 6E when the PI line is enabled high Channel Assignment The EVFU memory has the capacity for 192 line forms The first line identification code channel code in the memory load program defines the first line on the form the second line identification code defines the second line on the form etc Each line must have a line identification code Filler channel codes are used for lines that are not accessed by the print program Any channel code can be used as a filler except channel code 1 which is reserved for the top of form and channel code 12 which is reserved as the vertical tab channel The same filler channel code can be repeated as necessary for any number of lines Channel 1 The top of form code reserved as the first line on the form or the first line printed top of form position The operating program sends the channel 1 code to advance to the top of the next form After the memory is loaded a Form Feed code FF hex OC moves the paper to the next channel 1 top of form Channels 2 through 11 13 and 14 Used as general channel codes line identification codes or filler channels Each line on the form must be identified by a channel code When the operating program sends the channel code the paper advances to the line identified by the channel code Lines not used by the operating program must be identified by filler channels unused channel codes Chan
165. f the carriage return control code the emulation will either perform a carriage return function only or a carriage return and line feed based on the configuration for the CR function P Series XQ Default Values and States The factory settings for the P Series XQ emulation menu options are shown in Table 13 Table 13 also lists additional factory settings for parameters provided by the ASCII Emulation formatting menus The EMULATION menu options are described in the User s Manual Host control codes can override many of the settings for these menu options Table 13 P Series Default Settings Characteristic Default Setting Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Horizontal DPI Vertical DPI Prop Spacing Italic Print Slashed Zero Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Print Char Set Define CR code Auto LF Define LF code Advanced User Control Code 06 Compressed Print Bold 10 0 CPI 6 0 LPI Letter Gothic 120 DPI 72 DPI Enable Disable Disable 0 characters 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces CR CR Disable LF CR LF 8 0 LPI Char 01 SOH Disable P Series XQ Default Values and States Table 13 P Series Default Settings Characteristic Elong Alt Font Default Setting Elng BS Font SO Gothic Typeface EVFU Select Upr Case Select Slew Relative Text Position Host Command Reset Cmd CFG Ld Form Length Form Length Form Length Form Width Form
166. fault values 137 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes n3 Parameter n3 is provided for compatibility with the Proprinter III XL printer control language standard You may define any value for this parameter For Proprinters this bit must define the attached printer as either Proprinter value 03 or Proprinter III XL value 22 hex 16 n4 and n5 Parameter bytes n4 and n5 allow you to define several configuration parameters that will override conflicting factory default and memory based configuration values when the printer is reinitialized Possible values for n4 and n5 are listed in Table 29 and Table 30 respectively NOTE In addition to the formatting from bytes n4 and n5 this command sets the current line as top of form It also clears vertical tabs and sets the horizontal tabs at every eight columns starting at column 9 Table 29 n4 Values n4 Bit Function OFF 0 ON 1 7 Process this byte Process Ignore 6 Reserved Reserved Reserved 5 n a n a n a 4 Line Feed LF LF CR add CR with each LF 3 Carriage Return CR CR LF add LF with each CR 2 Set forms length 11 inches 12 inches 1 Slashed Zero Disable Enable 0 Character set 1 A 2 B 138 Table 30 n5 Values Line Feed n5 Bit Function OFF 0 ON 1 7 Process this byte Process Ignore 6 Code page 437 850 5 Unidirectional Bidirectional Unidirectional Printing 4 12
167. fter the line is printed at the new line spacing the default line spacing is automatically reselected Example THE 8 LPI CONTROL CODE O6CHEDO SELECTS 8 LPI SPACING FOR ONE LINE ONLY AND THEN AUTOMATICALLY RESETS TO THE PREVIOUS LINE SPACING 71 Chapter 3 Configuring the XQ Emulation with Control Codes Plot Even Dot P Series XQ High Density Graphics ASCII Code EOT Hex Code 04 Dec Code 4 Purpose Selects even dot plot mode to print dots in even numbered dot columns to produce high density plotting Comment The Even Dot Plot control code can occur anywhere in the data line before the line terminator It defines certain data between the next and last paper motion commands as even dot plot data These data are plotted at 60 by 72 dots per inch When this mode is exited the print mode and attributes last selected remain active A detailed description of plotting can be found in Chapter 8 Graphics This command can occur anywhere in the datastream and is acted upon immediately affecting the entire current print line Example CONTROL CODE O4 HEX SELECTS EVEN DOT PLOT COMBINED WITH ODD DOT PLOT FOR HIGH DENSITY GRAPHICS TWO LINES OF QQQQaQaQaQQ AS THE DATA RESULTS IN THE FOLLOWING DOT PATTERN 72 Plot Odd Dot P Series XQ Normal Density Graphics Plot Odd Dot P Series XQ Normal Density Graphics ASCII Code ENQ Hex Code 05 Dec Code 5 Purpose Selects odd dot plot mode to print dots in odd numbere
168. g the XQ Emulation with Control Codes 76 4 Serial Matrix Printer Protocol Introduction This chapter describes the Serial Matrix emulation host control codes Emulation refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language A printer control language is the coding system used to convey manipulate and print data Carriage Return print quality character attributes such as bold and underline margins and tabs are typical functions selected by printer control language codes In this manual the terms emulation printer protocol and printer control language are synonymous The Serial Matrix emulation is very similar to the code system used by an IBM Graphics Printer but contains more features This emulation enables your line matrix printer to print files coded for a serial matrix printer To select the Serial Matrix emulation mode as the active printer emulation select Serial Matrix from the Printer Control menu as described in the User s Manual The Serial Matrix emulation provides many configurable parameters The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 17 You can modify the emulation parameter values in two ways e The Serial Matrix host control codes An extensive set of Serial Matrix control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the Serial Matrix
169. h German German 3 33 Danish English UK English UK 4 34 Norwegian Danish Norw Danish 5 35 Finnish Swedish Swedish 6 36 English UK Italian Italian 7 87 Dutch Spanish Spanish 8 38 French Japanese Japanese 9 39 Spanish French Canadian French Canadian OA 3A Italian Latin American Dutch OB 3B Turkish Danish ll Finnish OC 3C Japanese Spanish ll Swiss OD 3D Latin American ll 92 Character Set Select International Languages Table 22 International Character Sets Character Set Selected IBM PC 0437 or SR DEC ECMA Latin 1 0850 Multinational Multinational currently undefined Comment The international character set can also be selected from the control panel The control code setting overrides the control panel character set selection Values other than those selectable from Table 22 are ignored Example The following example illustrates international character selection using the IBM PC character set CONTROL CODE ESC R 5 SELECTS THE SWEDISH CHARACTER SET SHOWN BENEATH THE USA ASCII CHARACTERS CL 1 A of AGAU ao 0 93 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Condensed Print ASCII Code SI ESC SI Hex Code OF 1B OF Dec Code 15 27 15 Purpose Selects 17 characters per inch cpi condensed print format Comment Condensed print can also be selected using control code ESC X See Print Mode Pitch Selection on page 108
170. haracter Pitch 15 cpi Horizontal Tab Execute Horizontal Tab Set Release Select Deselect Proportional Spacing Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position in 1 60 Inch Set Intercharacter Spacing in 1 120 Inch Set Margin Left Set Margin Right Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in 1 120 Inch ASCII CODE ESC C NUL n ESC b c n1 n2n3 n18 NUL ESCNn ESCO VT ESC B n1 n2 nk NUL BS CR ESCP ESCM ESC g HT ESC D n1 nk NUL ESCpn ESC n1 n2 ESC SP n ESCIn ESCQn ESC n1 n2 PAGE 165 177 183 183 184 184 185 185 186 190 190 195 197 198 199 199 200 203 203 164 165 165 165 166 181 181 194 195 196 196 197 198 161 Chapter 162 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes FUNCTION Emphasis Condensed Print Condensed Print Reset Double High Print Set Reset Double Strike Double Strike Cancel Double Wide Print Double Wide Print 1 Line Double Wide Print 1 Line Cancel Emphasized Print Emphasized Print Cancel Italic Printing Italic Printing Cancel t Superscript and Subscript Printing Superscript and Subscript Printing Cancel Underline Print Quality Control Define a Download Character Master Print Select Remove Downloaded Characters Select Print Quality Select Serif or Sans Serif Font Select User Defined Font ne Character Set Manipulation Character Set Select International LanguagesESC R n Enable Printing He
171. he ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required DATA consist of 8 bit dot columns with the MSB at the top and 1 bits producing dots For more information refer to Chapter 8 Graphics Comment You can change graphics density with the ESC command Example The following example produces double density bit image graphics of the pattern used in the standard density bit image mode example The amount of data must be doubled for double density the data are used 54 times rather than 27 DOUBLE DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS 178 Graphics Double Density Double Speed Graphics Double Density Double Speed ASCII Code ESC Y n1 n2 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where 1B 59 n1 n2 27 89 n1 n2 Selects double density double speed bit image graphics of 120 dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically n1 256n2 defines the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment Example DATA consist of 8 bit dot columns with the MSB at the top and 1 bits producing dots For more information refer to Chapter 8 Graphics This mode prints double density with no adjacent dots It is similar to ESC L except that if th
172. he code to permit the scan to begin and end in a blank area You are responsible for providing sufficient space minimum of seven modules on the form for the quiet zones The number system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone Start Center Stop Codes The start center stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of the bar code These codes are automatically provided Number System Character The number system character field allows you to provide a code to a class or type of item The first character in the data field is used as the number system character Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent a limited character set numbers 0 9 and Special Characters Start Center and Stop The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven modules The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right data field to permit read direction sensing Readable Data The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code symbol 246 FIM Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The number system character is included in the check digit algorithm F
173. he pattern used in the standard density example The amount of data must be quadrupled for quadruple density the data are used 108 times rather than 27 QUAD DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS Half Speed Mode On Off ASCII Code ESC s n Hex Code 1B73n Dec Code 27115n Purpose Reduces printer speed 50 where n hex 00 or 30 turns half speed mode off n hex 01 or 31 turns half speed mode on Comment This command is ignored 180 Horizontal Tab Execute Horizontal Tab Execute ASCII Code HT Hex Code 09 Dec Code 9 Purpose Moves the logical print head to the next horizontal tab stop Comment Power on default horizontal tabs are set at every eighth character at the current character spacing Tab positions are not affected by a change of font or character width Blank spaces between HT stops are underlined in underline mode Horizontal Tab Set Release ASCII Code ESC D n1 nk NUL Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example 1B 44 n1 nk 00 27 68 n1 nk 0 Sets up to 32 horizontal tab positions n1 through n32 specify the character column of the tab positions NUL is the sequence terminator ESC D NUL clears all tabs The values of n must be listed in ascending order or they are ignored Tabs greater than 32 or those positioned beyond the right margin are ignored The physical tab position is the product of n and the current cell width 1 pitch excluding double wide After the tabs a
174. her example of expanded printing is shown for Expanded Double Wide Print ESC W on page 132 EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING FOR ONE LINE ONLY Expanded Double Wide Print Reset 1 Line ASCII Code DC4 ESC DC4 Hex Code 14 1B 14 Dec Code 20 27 20 Purpose Cancels expanded double wide print set by SO where If the emulation is set at 5 cpi it is set to 10 cpi If the emulation is set at 6 cpi it is set to 12 cpi If the emulation is set at 8 55 cpi it is set to 17 1 cpi 133 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Form Feed ASCII Code FF Hex Code OC Dec Code 12 Purpose Prints the data in the buffer advances the paper position to the next top of form and moves the character position to the first character column Comment The default forms length is determined by the configuration in nonvolatile memory Forms length is set by using the control panel or forms length control codes Code FF cancels all single line only print attributes The Form Feed command reacts differently when the VFU is active See Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting Forms Length Set Inches ASCII Code ESC C NUL n Hex Code 1B4300n Dec Code 27670n Purpose Sets the length of forms paper in inches where n whole numbers from 1 through 21 hex 01 through hex 15 to specify the number of inches on a page Comment Upon receipt of this code the current line becomes the first line of th
175. hrough 255 Comment All line feeds following receipt of this code are at n 216 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset Line spacing set by this control code overrides line spacing setting set at the operator panel The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing the remainder is added to the next paper motion command Paper movement occurs in multiples of 3 216 only Use caution when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript overlapping lines may occur Example The following example illustrates n 216 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC 3 50 SETS LINE SPACING AT 50 216 INCH INCREMENTS FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED 186 Make Hex 80 9F Control Codes Make Hex 80 9F Control Codes ASCII Code ESC 7 Hex Code 1B 37 Dec Code 2755 Purpose Selects hex 80 9F in the character sets as control codes Comment This is the default when the Epson character set is selected as the default set at the operator panel Make Hex 80 9F Printable ASCII Code ESC 6 Hex Code 1B 36 Dec Code 2754 Purpose Selects hex 80 9F in the character sets as printable characters Comment This is the default when the IBM PC character set code page 0437 is selected as the default set
176. ical diameter of 1 60 inch You may also use the Horizontal DPI and Vertical DPI menus chosen via the control panel to select target machine dots 271 Chapter 8 Bit Image Graphics Bit Image Graphics Bit Image Graphics mode is selected when the emulation is in Serial Matrix Proprinter XL or Epson FX emulation mode Bit Image Graphics are created by printing a series of vertical bit image data bytes which represent the binary code bit pattern Bit Image mode utilizes the 1 or true bits from a binary data byte to print dot patterns These data bytes are actually the binary equivalent of ASCII character decimal values 0 through 255 Figure 26 shows the binary data byte bit pattern for the ASCII character A hex 41 decimal 65 MSB O I JOIO OJOJOI T Figure 26 Binary Data Byte If this data byte is rotated vertically the result is a vertical data byte pattern with the most significant bit MSB at the top as shown in Figure 27 MSB MSB OL HLOOIOIOO TH T Figure 27 Vertical Data Byte Pattern If each 1 or true bit is plotted the result is a Bit Image plot of the ASCII character A The relationship of ASCII character decimal value and Bit Image plot is shown in Figure 28 272 Plotting a Bit Image Pattern BINARY VERTICALLY ASCII DECIMAL CODE To ROTATED DATA BIT IMAGE CHARACTER VALUE EQUIVALENT BYTE PATTERN Figure 28 Vertical Data Byte Pattern The byte in the previous exam
177. ical tab format is defined in the EVFU channel 12 and the VFU is enabled the paper is moved to the next vertical tab position If a vertical tab format is not defined the paper is advanced to the next line at the current line spacing More information on vertical tabs is provided in the EVFU section of Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting CONTROL CODE ESC B 15 20 0 SETS A VERTICAL TAB AT LINE 15 AND AT LINE 20 CONTROL CODE VT MOVES PAPER TO THE NEXT VERTICAL TAB CONTROL CODE VT MOVES PAPER TO THE NEXT VERTICAL TAB THIS IS LINE TWENTY 59 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes 60 3 P Series XO Printer Protocol Introduction This chapter describes the P Series XQ emulation host control codes Emulation refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language A printer control language is the coding system used to convey manipulate and print data Carriage Return print quality character attributes such as bold and underline margins and tabs are typical functions selected by printer control language codes In this manual the terms emulation printer protocol and printer control language are synonymous The P Series XQ emulation was devised for a series of Printronix printers manufactured between 1974 and 1991 but no longer available This emulation enables your printer to emulate Printronix P300 and P600 printers with A7 B10 boards To
178. ight Font width Glyph Host computer Appendix E _ Glossary The header file that contains the tables describing allowed the mode and pitch combinations The file also contains the tables used to set up the character sets and the international languages within the character sets See typeface A font pattern is the matrix of pels which represents a character symbol or image A font printed parallel to the long edge of a page ora font capable of being produced on a landscape page orientation Also called fixed pitch fonts Every character regardless of actual horizontal size occupies the same amount of font pattern space All monospaced fonts use specific pitch size settings Monospaced fonts are sometimes used when strict character alignment is desired tables charts spreadsheets etc A font printed parallel to the short edge of a page A font in which the width of the character cell varies with the width of the character For example i takes less space to print than m Using proportional fonts generally increases the readability of printed documents giving text a typeset appearance This manual is printed in proportional fonts See character weight The measurement of the width of a character cell in dots G The shape of a character in a print mode and pitch H The host computer stores processes and sends data to be printed and which communicates directly with the printer The term h
179. in the buffer if any and advances the vertical character position one line at the current line space setting Comment If configured for LF equals new line LF CR LF the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 of the new line Otherwise the logical print head does not move when configured for LF function only LF LF ONLY The LF function cancels all single line print attributes such as double high elongated and double wide expanded characters This code is always configured for LF CR LF in the P Series XQ protocol In the P Series XQ Even Dot Plot mode high density graphics the LF code does not cause paper position motion the data in the buffer is plotted and the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 in anticipation of the Odd Dot Plot control code to complete high density graphic plotting In the P Series XQ Odd Dot Plot mode normal density graphics the LF code plots the data in the buffer advances the paper position a single dot row at the current vertical dot density and positions the logical print head at character column 1 Line Spacing 8 or 10 3 Ipi ASCII Code ACK Hex Code 06 Dec Code 6 Purpose Selects line spacing of 1 8 inch or 7 72 inch for current line only Comment The line spacing control code can be placed anywhere in the data stream before the line terminator code however we recommend that you place the line spacing code at the start or end of the data line A
180. inational 0 hex 30 ASCII USA ASCII USA ASCII USA ASCII USA 1 hex 31 French EBCDIC German French 2 hex 32 German Swedish German 3 hex 33 English UK Danish English UK 4 hex 34 Danish Norwegian Norwegian Danish 5 hex 35 Swedish Finnish Swedish 6 hex 36 Italian English UK Italian 7 hex 37 Spanish Dutch Spanish 8 hex 38 Japanese French Japanese 9 hex 39 French Canadian Spanish French Canadian 10 hex 3A Latin American Italian Dutch 11 hex 3B Norwegian Turkish Finnish 31 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Table 4 International Language Select y X 0 hex 30 X 1 hex 31 X 2 hex 32 X 3 hex 33 g IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Multinational 12 hex 3C Danish II Japanese Swiss 13 hex 3D Spanish II 14 hex 3E Latin Am Il Table 5 Extended Character Set Select z x 0 hex 30 X 1 hex 31 X 2 hex 32 X 3 hex 33 5 IBM PC Multinational ECMA Latin 1 DEC Multinational 0 hex 30 IBM PC 0437 Mult Extended Gei Barcode 10 cpi DEC Mult Ext Set 1 hex 31 IBM PC 0850 Mult DP 10 cpi 2 hex 32 Mult DP 12 cpi 3 hex 33 Mult NLQ 10 cpi 4 hex 34 Greek DP 10 cpi 5 hex 35 Greek DP 12 cpi 6 hex 36 Greek NLQ 10 cpi 7 hex 37 Graphics DP 10 cpi 8 hex 38 Graphics NLQ 10 cpi 9 hex 39 Scientific DP 10 cpi 10 hex 3A Scientific DP 12 cpi 11 hex 3B Scientific NLQ 10 cpi 12 hex 3C Multination
181. including typeface and point size e Select proportional fonts See Chapter 7 Super Set Programming for further information on the super set commands Underline ASCII Code ESC n Hex Code 1B2Dn Dec Code 2745n Purpose Enables or disables automatic underlining of all characters where n 0 to disable automatic underlining hex 00 or hex 30 n 1 to enable automatic underlining hex 01 or hex 31 Comment When automatic underline is enabled all characters including spaces are underlined until disabled Example The following sample illustrates automatic underlining and underlining reset CONTROL CODE ESC 1 ENABLES AUTOMATIC UNDERLINING CONTROL CODE ESC O DISABLES AUTOMATIC UNDERLINING 114 Vertical Tab Vertical Tab ASCII Code VT Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 0B 11 Prints the data in the buffer and advances the paper to the next vertical tab position Vertical tab positions are set by control code ESC B and executed by control code VT In this mode if vertical tabs are loaded the paper position moves to the next vertical tab position If a vertical tab format is not defined the paper position is advanced to the next line at the current line spacing If a vertical tab format is defined but no vertical tab positions are set between the current print position and the end of the form the paper position is advanced to the top of the next form The VT code resets all single line prin
182. ing Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent the entire ASCII character set Each narrow bar or space is one element each wide bar or space is three elements each character in the data field has a total of sixteen elements Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The optional modulo 127 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning 257 Chapter 7 Bar Codes UCC EAN 128 The UCC EAN 128 bar code structure is shown in Figure 21 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT POSITION fat Se 1 I UPPER GUARD BAND i I Bee Sr l I QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET e wn sel LOWER GUARD BAND Ex edel OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 21 UCC EAN 128 Structure UCC EAN 128 uses the same bar code and character set as Code 128 However in UCC EAN 128 the Function 1 character FNC1 immediately follows the start code The FNC1 character has been reserved exclusively for UCC EAN 128 The UCC EAN 128 data structure requires an Application Identifier Al at the beginning of bar code data Each AI determines the format and length of the data which follows See Table 74 for more detail 258 Table 74 UCC EAN 128 Application Identifiers UCC EAN 128
183. int Each column is sent as a pair d1 d3 d k 1 set the top 8 bits of a normal dot column just like ESC K d2 d4 dk set the ninth dot in the column the most significant bit just below the bottom most dot of columns d1 d3 d k 1 193 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Select Print Quality ASCII Code ESC x n Hex Code 1B78n Dec Code 27120n Purpose Selects print quality Comment This command is ignored on thermal printers Select Deselect Proportional Spacing ASCII Code ESC p n Hex Code 1B70n Dec Code 27112n where nis an integer n 0 Off n 1 On Purpose Turns proportional mode on and off Select Serif or Sans Serif Font ASCII Code ESC k n Hex Code 1B6Bn Dec Code 27107n Purpose Selects a Courier font where if n 0 2 4 any even value the font selected is a serif Courier font Courier instead of standard Epson Roman if n 1 3 5 any odd value the font selected is a sans serif Courier font ESC k n SELECTS SERIF OR SANS SERIF NLQ COURIER FONTS FOR EXAMPLE THIS FONT HAS A SERIF s THIS FONT DOES NOT HAVE A SERIF 194 Select User Defined Font Select User Defined Font ASCII Code ESC n Hex Code 1B25n Dec Code 2737n Purpose Selects a user defined font TComment The printer ignores this command and removes all font data sent from the data stream Select Vertical Tab Channel ASCII Code ESC c Hex Code 1B2Fc
184. int position and the end of the form the paper position is advanced to the top of the next form The VT code resets all single line print attributes More information on vertical tabs is provided in Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting 151 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes 152 Vertical Tab Set Clear ASCII Code ESC B n1 n2 n3 nk NUL Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example CONTROL CODE 1B 42 n1 n2 n3 nk 00 27 66n1n2n3 nkO Sets vertical tab positions n1 through nk specify the line number for the vertical tab s for a maximum of 64 tab positions NUL must be used as the sequence terminator The physical position on the paper is the product of n and the current line spacing Subsequent line spacing changes alter the tab position If the value of n defines a tab stop that exceeds the forms length that tab position is ignored Vertical tab positions are set by control code ESC B and executed by control code VT The tab positions must be in ascending order or the sequence terminates More information on Proprinter XL vertical tab setting is provided in Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting If the ESC B command is followed immediately by a NUL the vertical tab positions are cleared The following sample illustrates vertical tab setting ESC B 15 20 O SETS A VERTICAL TAB AT LINE 15 AND AT LINE 20 CONTROL CODE VT MOVES PAPER TO THE NEXT VERTICAL TAB
185. ion The ASCII Emulation includes the standard Electronic Vertical Format Unit EVFU for use with the P Series and P Series XQ protocols and a Vertical Format Unit VFU for use with the Serial Matrix Proprinter XL and Epson FX protocols Each vertical format unit provides an efficient method for rapid vertical paper movement slewing during repetitive printing tasks The EVFU is a software controlled vertical formatter It allows you to preprogram frequently used lines on forms and documents for efficient paper handling in merging operations such as invoicing or payrolling By flagging each line to be printed the EVFU automatically slews the paper rapidly advances the paper to the identified lines The EVFU provides 14 or 16 channels to identify up to 192 lines depending on the paper instruction The EVFU also allows you to slew a specific number of lines on the form General P Series EVFU Programming Information A vertical format unit provides an efficient way to move the paper position during repetitive printing tasks The type of VFU used is a configuration option selected from the control panel If not used the VFU option should be disabled from the control panel The general VFU programming procedure is 1 Design a form determining spacing and channel assignments for each line 2 Send the programming sequence to the printer The sequence depends on the type of VFU used Some VFUs require the PI signal line normall
186. ion of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The start code is included in the check digit algorithm NOTE Access for the alternate set of control function characters is by using SO Shift Out hex OE The SO control code identifies the next character as the control function character and must be inserted before each alternate character required The SO character is selectable from the printer s front panel refer to your User s Manual 241 Chapter 7 Bar Codes Table 69 Code 128A Character Set Character Hex Character Hex Character Hex Character Hex NUL 00 SUB 1A 34 4E SOH 01 ESC 1B 35 AE STX 02 FS 1C 36 50 ETX 03 GS 1D 37 51 EOT 04 RS 1E 38 52 ENQ 05 US 1F 39 53 ACK 06 20 3A 54 BEL 07 21 3B 55 BS 08 22 lt 3C 56 HT 09 23 3D 57 LF 0A 24 3E 58 VT 0B 25 3F 59 FF oc 26 40 5A CR OD 27 41 5B SO OE 28 42 5C SI OF 29 43 5D DLE 10 2A 44 5E 11 2B 45 5F 12 2C 46 FNC 3 See NOTE 13 2D 47 FNC 2 See NOTE 14 1 2E 48 SHIFT See NOTE 15 2F 49 CODEC See NOTE 16 30 4A FUNC 4 See NOTE 17 31 4B CODE B See NOTE 18 32 4C FNC 1 See NOTE 19 33 4D START A STOP Tomnmoou gov 7 NX Xx xz cauomovoz SE ee 242 Code 128 Table 70 Code 128B Charcter Set Character Hex Character Hex Character Hex Character Hex
187. istance in printer dots ASCII Code SSCCZ n Hex Code SSCC5An Dec Code SSCC 90n Purpose Define the absolute horizontal movement from column zero where n four digit number specifying the move distance in printer dots PCX Data ASCII Code SSCC PCX data ESC RASTEREND Hex Code SSCC 27 PCX data 1B RASTEREND Dec Code SSCC 39 PCX data 27 RASTEREND Purpose Prints PCX data Line Spacing n 288 Inch ASCII Code SSCC Ln Hex Code SSCC 4C n Dec Code SSCC 76n Purpose Specifies the line spacing in n 288 inch increments where n 0001 through 9999 four ASCII digits Comment When the n 288 inch line spacing command is received all character printing is at n 288 inch vertical spacing until a new line spacing is selected 214 Page Orientation Select Page Orientation Select ASCII Code SSCC O n alpha O Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment SSCC 4F n SSCC 79 n Set change page orientation The emulation can print in four different clockwise orientations Portrait 0 Inverse Landscape 90 Inverse Portrait 180 and Landscape 270 The following table shows how to set or change the page orientation Table 51 Page Orientation n Value hex Page Orientation n 0or30 Portrait 0 n 1or31 Landscape 270 n 2or32 Inverse Portrait 180 n 3or33 Inverse Landscape 90 End the syntax with a line terminator such as a line feed or carriage return Different orientations
188. ithin the right margin Horizontal Tab ASCII Code HT Hex Code 09 Dec Code 9 Purpose Moves the logical printhead right to the next horizontal tab stop Comment Power on default horizontal tabs are set at every eighth character in the Serial Matrix printer protocol If there are no horizontal tabs set or the logical printhead is located at the last character column the code is ignored and no movement occurs Horizontal tabs are stored as a relative position therefore character pitch changes change horizontal tab positions See Horizontal Tab Set below to set new tab positions 102 Horizontal Tab Set Horizontal Tab Set ASCII Code ESC D n1 nk NUL Hex Code 1B 44 nf nk 00 Dec Code 27 68 n1 nk0 Purpose Sets up to 32 horizontal tab positions where n1 through n32 specify the character column of the tab positions NUL is the sequence terminator Comment Up to 32 different tab positions may be set The values must be listed in ascending order or they are ignored The physical tab position is the product of n and the current cell width 1 pitch excluding double wide Tabs in excess of 32 or those positioned beyond the paper s right margin are also ignored Tab positions may be cleared by sending the ESC D NUL sequence Powering the printer on off initializes the tabs to every eighth character column Horizontal tabs are accessed by control code HT Example The following example illustrates horizontal tab set
189. jacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Center Stop Codes The start center stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of the bar code These codes are automatically provided Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent a limited character set numbers 0 9 and Special Characters Start Center and Stop The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven modules The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right data field to permit read direction sensing Readable Data The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning 245 Chapter 7 Bar Codes EAN 13 The EAN 13 bar code structure is shown in Figure 12 and described below SR SC START CODE Ge CODE STOP CODE POSITION e Ic QuiET LEFT DATA RIGHT DATA quiet ZONE FIELD FIELD ZONE NUMBER SYSTEM LN CHARACTER OPTIONAL READABLE CHECK DIGIT DATA FIELD FIELD Figure 12 EAN 13 Structure Quiet Zone Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit t
190. k of Fundici n Tipogr fica Neufville S A ITC Avant Garde Gothic ITC Benguiat ITC Bookman ITC Century ITC Cheltenham ITC Clearface ITC Galliard ITC Korinna ITC Lubalin Graph ITC Souvenir ITC Tiepolo ITC Zapf Chancery and ITC Zapf Dingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation Albertus Gill Sans and Times New Roman are registered trademarks and Monotype Baskerville is a trademark of The Monotype Corporation Plc registered in the U S Pat and TM office and elsewhere Hiroshige and Marigold are trademarks of AlphaOmega Typography Inc Table of Contents NES Cu aniraa Eaa EEE EEEE 17 erigere Wei 17 About This Manual nennen 17 Software Features 18 Printer Configuration zessin ee ae ae aa e ea eaa eagai at 19 2 P Series Printer Protocol 21 Introductionis ET 21 P Series Default Values and States ssssssssssss 22 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes 24 Format for Control Code Descriptons eerren 24 Special Function Control Code Control Code Header 24 Command LIME sesaria kanoan oane ROLE AES EIER ee EORR ESSR 25 Attribute Set and Reset Code 26 Control Code Reference Index 26 e lee 28 Bell M HR iE 28 Ee e EE 29 Bold Print Reset cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeenaaes 29 Carriage PHetum nnne nnne nnns 30 Character Set Select uice ee rerit
191. l location on the paper where the next character prints After printing a character the printer advances the active column The position on the paper where the next character prints The active position is defined by the horizontal position active column and the vertical position active line Abbreviation of American Standard Code for Information Interchange B A unit of speed that measures the rate at which information is transferred Baud rate is the reciprocal of the length in seconds of the shortest pulse used to carry data For example a system in which the shortest pulse is 1 1200 second operates at 1200 baud On RS 232 serial lines the baud rate equals the data flow rate in bits per second bps To communicate properly a printer must be configured to operate at the same baud rate as its host computer A typeface with a heavy line thickness produced by a double strike print method See also character weight Compare with shadow printing A reserved area in printer memory that data is written to and read from during data transfers 313 Appendix E _ Glossary 314 Character Character cell Character Library Character Location Character set Character weight Code Point Command sequence Compressed cpi C A graphical representation of data The invisible rectangular space occupied by a character including the white space around the character Used as a unit of spacing The height of a
192. lation with Control Codes Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes IMPORTANT 24 The remainder of this chapter describes the P Series printer control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer in order to invoke and configure numerous P Series emulation functions Format for Control Code Descriptions The following information is listed for each code function where applicable Name The title or function of the command ASCII Code The ASCII mnemonic for the command is shown Command sequences are in 7 bit ASCII form Hex Code The code or command sequence in hexadecimal numbers Dec Code The code or command sequence in decimal numbers Purpose The function s of the control code Comment A discussion of the uses of the code or command sequence including exceptions or limitations to its use Example A sample is provided for some control codes when it is possible to illustrate the effect of a control code or if a specific syntax is required to complete the program statement i e Horizontal Tab set Vertical Tab set clear If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that are defined in the control code description unpredictable results may occur Special Function Control Code Control Code Header A Special Function Control Code SFCC is used to extend the control code protocol The SFCC is the control code introducer or header it is the fi
193. le Density Bit Image Graphics 20 LPRINT CHR 27 K CHRS 24 CHR 1 30 FOR N 1 TO 40 40 RESTORE 50 FOR I 1 TO 7 60 READ R 70 LPRINT CHR R 80 NEXT I 90 NEXT N 100 DATA 73 146 36 255 36 146 73 110 LPRINT Single Density Bit Image Graphics Figure 30 Sample Single Density Bit Image Graphics 277 Chapter 8 P Series Compatible Plot Mode Odd Even Dot Plotting P Series Compatible Plot Mode Odd Even Dot Plotting This subsection describes the P Series compatible odd even dot Plot mode of operation The P Series plot has a rigid format wherein each line of data contains a plot command code the plot data and an LF code hex OA The P Series codes hex 04 and 05 respectively can be placed anywhere on the command line The P Series XQ codes hex 04 and 05 respectively can also be placed anywhere on the command line without degrading plot speed When P Series Plot mode is enabled by an EOT hex 04 or ENQ hex 05 code all control codes except LF CR and FF are ignored Any control sequence parameter prior to a plot code is acted upon immediately Any control sequence parameter following an EOT or ENQ code is treated as plot data If any combination of EOT hex 04 or ENQ hex 05 code is received in a single line the priority of action is EOT hex 04 takes priority over ENQ hex 05 ENQ has the same priority level and is acted upon in the order received A printable symbol is define
194. le to the double density and quadruple density examples SINGLE DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS PSENSISNDSPSBISISNISI I SPNISIRSINSISSISISESBBGISGSGSS SMSM Bit Image Mode Double Density ASCII Code ESC L n1 n2 Hex Code BAC n1 n2 Dec Code 2776 n1 n2 Purpose Selects Double Density Bit Image graphics where n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment For detailed information see the Bit Image section in Chapter 8 Graphics Example The following example produces Double Density Bit Image graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image Mode example Note that the amount of data must be doubled for double density the data is used 54 times rather than 27 Double Density Bit Image Graphics 124 Bit Image Mode Double Density Double Speed Bit Image Mode Double Density Double Speed ASCII Code ESC Y n1 n2 Hex Code 1B59n1n2 Dec Code 27 89n1n2 Purpose Selects Double Density Double Speed Bit Image graphics where n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially i
195. low NUMBER OPTIONAL CHECK SYSTEM NUMBER SYSTEM READABLE DIGIT CHARACTER CHARACTER FIELD DATA FIELD CHARACTER Figure 23 UPC E Structure Quiet Zone Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin and end in a blank area You must provide sufficient space minimum of seven modules on the form for the quiet zones The number system character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone Start Stop Codes The start stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of the bar code These codes are automatically provided Number System Character The number system character field for all UPC E bar codes must be zero Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent a limited character set numbers 0 9 and Special Characters Start and Stop The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven modules For UPC E eleven digits are expected which are compressed down to the six encoded symbol characters Readable Data The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code symbol 265 Chapter 7 Bar Codes Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The n
196. m and the Overwrite Enable feature in the Flash File System menu is set to disable a warning will be displayed on the front panel After clearing the warning the file data will be printed To overwrite the existing file set the Overwrite Files option to enable Due to the nature of writing to flash any data intended to be stored permanently in flash must first be copied into RAM As a result the ability to manipulate files in the Flash File System is dependent upon the printer having sufficient RAM None of the captured file data will be committed to flash until the entire file is loaded The PTR_SETUP parser will interpret the command FILE_IO CAPTURE lt lf gt as an end of file marker Receipt of the command will cause all file data to be written to flash The file system allocates RAM for temporary data storage in 1 Kbyte blocks If at any time during the file download the printer runs out of RAM a warning will be displayed on the front panel and as much of the file as possible will be saved in flash To download larger files you may need to add additional RAM to the printer Three things can limit the ability to save a file insufficient RAM insufficient Flash and lack of empty file system entries Flash can only be written once before it needs to be optimized As a result the maximum file size is limited to the largest unwritten block of Flash If any of these problems occur the printer will display an error message and will at
197. m the configuration menus NOTE Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to the printer s NVRAM memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer or reset it to the factory default configuration The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the User s Manual To save the configuration using host control codes refer to Appendix B PID SETUP Option 117 Chapter 118 5 Introduction Proprinter Ill XL Emulation Default Settings The factory settings for the Proprinter IIl XL emulation menu options are shown in Table 26 Table 27 lists additional factory settings for parameters provided by the ASCII Emulation formatting menus The EMULATION menu options are described in the User s Manual Host control codes can override many of the settings for these menu options Table 26 Proprinter III XL Menu Option Factory Settings Characteristic Default Setting Define CR Code Auto LF Define LF Code FF Valid at TOF Character Set 20 CPI Condensed CR CR Enable LF LF Enable Code Page 437 Enable Proprinter Ill XL Emulation Default Settings Table 27 ASCII Emulation Menu Option Factory Settings Characteristic Default Setting Orientation CPI LPI Typeface Proportional Spacing Bold Print Italic Print Slashed Zero Text Position Horizontal DPI Vertical DPI Logical Form Left Margin Right
198. mat is as follows e Each data byte specifies six out of twelve plot dot columns e Using odd dot plot mode bits 1 through 6 of the data byte address the odd numbered dot columns using even dot plot mode bits 1 through 6 of the data byte address the even numbered dot columns e Bit 6 and or bit 7 of the data byte must be a 1 or true bit in the Plot mode e Bit 8 of the data byte is not used in the Plot mode and may be 1 or O e The binary equivalent of the plot data bytes must be known to accurately address specific dot positions As shown in Figure 33 a dot is printed at the location addressed by each of bits 1 through 6 in the data byte that is set 1 or true 279 Chapter 8 P Series Compatible Plot Mode Odd Even Dot Plotting EVEN DOT PLOT DATA BYTE MSB BIT 1 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4 BITS BIT6 BIT7 BIT8 NOTE BIT 6 AND OR BIT 7 MUST BE 1 2 4 6 8 10 12 FOR PLOT MODE DOT COLUMN 1 OF NEXT CHARACTER COLUMN DOT COLUMN 12 OF PREVIOUS CHARACTER COLUMN NOTE IN ACTUAL E TO PRINT ON THE SAME ROW NOT USED RE 1 BIT2 BITS BIT4 BITS BIT6 BIT7 n E ODD DOT PLOT DATA BYTE Figure 33 P Series Plot Data Byte Format See Appendix D P Series Plot Byte Definition for a complete definition of the valid plot data bytes Plot Data Line Format A plot data line may contain the following plot data bytes When using 132 column paper the maximum bytes are 132 for a horizontal dot density of
199. me for the control code Hex Code The code s numeric equivalent in hexadecimal Dec Code The code s numeric equivalent in decimal Purpose The function s of the control code Discussion A description of exceptions or limitations to normal use Example A sample is provided for some control codes when it is possible to illustrate the effect of a control code or if a specific syntax is required to complete the program statement i e Horizontal Tab set Vertical Tab set clear If you specify any parameters for a control code other than the ones that are defined in the control code description unpredictable results may occur Escape Control Code Header Serial Matrix codes use only ESC as the control code header For example to enable bold print in the Serial Matrix printer protocol use the Serial Matrix ESC and the bold print control code character G as follows Ascii ESC G Hex 1B 47 Dec 2771 Attribute Set and Reset Codes Certain print attributes are set or reset turned on or off by using the appropriate ESC code sequence and the numbers 1 or 0 These may be either the hexadecimal code 01 and 00 or the ASCII code for the printable symbols of decimal 1 and 0 hexadecimal code 31 and 30 respectively Expanded Print Superscript Subscript Print and Underline are attributes which are set and reset in this fashion Control Code Index Control Code Index This index lists each printer command by function ASCII mne
200. meter value set by a host control code generally overrides a value set from the printer s control panel NOTE Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to the printer s NVRAM memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer or reset it to the factory defaults The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the User s Manual To save the configuration using host control codes refer to Appendix B PID SETUP Option 153 Chapter 154 6 Introduction Epson FX 1050 Default Values and States The factory settings for the Epson FX 1050 emulation menu options are shown in Table 35 Table 36 lists additional factory settings for parameters provided by the ASCII Emulation formatting menus The EMULATION menu options are described in the User s Manual Host control codes can override many of the settings for these menu options Table 35 Epson Emulation Menu Option Factory Settings Characteristic Default Setting Define CR Code Auto LF Define LF Code Printer Select Character Set 20 CPI Condensed CR CR Enable LF LF Disable Epson Set ASCII USA Enable Epson FX 1050 Default Values and States Table 36 ASCII Emulation Menu Option Factory Settings Characteristic Default Setting Orientation CPI LPI Typeface Proportional Spacing Bold Print Italic Print Slashed Zero Text Position Hori
201. milar to POSTNET in terms of bar space and width but have four different types of bars Full Height Ascender Descender and Tracker whereas POSTNET only has two bar types Tall and Short The Australian 4 State symbology converts alphanumeric characters into patterns of four bars using combinations of Full Height Ascender Descender and Trackers It also adds start and stop bar codes as well as Reed Solomon parity information Quiet Zone Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin and end in a blank area The quiet zones should be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start and stop bars identify the orientation of the bar code The start bar consists of an ascender bar and is positioned at the leftmost end of the bar code The stop bar consists of a full height bar and is positioned at the rightmost end of the bar code adjacent to the check digit Check Digit No check digit is calculated for the Australian 4 State bar code The Reed Solomon parity information is automatically included 232 Australian 4 State Data Field Australian 4 State bar codes use four types of bars to encode its data Full Height Ascender Descender and Tracker Each Full Height bar is 0 198 inch
202. monic and the page where the command is explained in detail The rest of this chapter defines the control code functions for Serial Matrix Emulation mode The commands are listed in alphabetical order FUNCTION Paper Motion Form Feed Line Feed Line Feed n 216 Inch 1 line only Vertical Tab Page Format Backspace Cancel Carriage Return Delete Forms Length Set Inches Forms Length Set Lines Form Margins Set Horizontal Tab Horizontal Tab Set Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi Line Spacing 7 72 Inch Line Spacing n 72 Inch as executed by ESC 2 Line Spacing n 216 Inch Skip Over Perforation Skip Over Perforation Cancel Vertical Tab Set Clear Print Attributes Bold Print Bold Print Reset Character Pitch 10 cpi Character Pitch 12 cpi Condensed Print Condensed Print Reset ASCII CODE FF LF ESC Jn VT BS CAN CR DEL ESC C NUL n ESC Cn ESC v HT ESC D n1 nk NUL ESC 2 ESC 0 ESC 1 ESC An ESC 3n ESC Nn ESC O ESC B n1 n2 n3 nk NUL ESC G ESC H ESC P ESC M SI ESC SI DC2 ESC Elongated Double High Print 1 line ESC h Elongated Double High Print Set Reset Emphasized Print Emphasized Print Reset Expanded Double Wide Print Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only ESCw n ESCE ESCF ESCW n SO ESC SO PAGE 100 103 104 115 83 87 88 94 100 101 102 102 103 105 105 106 106 107 112 113
203. mulation 78 Define a download character Epson FX 1050 Emulation 169 Delete P Series XQ Emulation 69 Serial Matrix Emulation 94 Delete Character Epson FX 1050 Emulation 169 Deselect Printer IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 131 Differences Epson FX 1050 Emulation 156 Double High Print Set Reset Epson FX 1050 Emulation 170 P Series 40 Double Strike Cancel Epson FX 1050 Emulation 171 Double Strike Epson FX 1050 Emulation 171 Double Wide Print 1 Line Cancel Epson FX 1050 Emulation 173 Double Wide Print 1 Emulation 173 Double Wide Print Epson FX 1050 Emulation 172 Download character set overlay 36 E EAN 13 Bar Code 246 EAN 8 Bar Code 245 Edit mode P Series XQ Emulation 64 Electronic Vertical Format Unit P Series XQ Emulation 69 Elongated Characters P Series XQ Emulation 70 Elongated Print Set Reset P Series Emulation 40 Serial Matrix Emulation 96 Elongated Print One Line Only Serial Matrix Emulation 95 Elongated print P Series Emulation 39 EMCA 94 Latin 1 Extended P Series Emulation 34 Emphasized Print Epson FX 1050 Emulation 174 IBM Proprinter Ill XL Emulation 131 Serial Matrix Emulation 96 Emphasized Print Cancel Emulation 174 Emphasized Print Reset IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation 131 P Series Emulation 41 Serial Matrix Emulation 97 Emphasized Print P Series Emulation 41 Emulation Reset P Series Emulation 42 Serial Matrix Emulation 97 End Load Code Hex 1F
204. n cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment For detailed information see the Bit Image section in Chapter 8 Graphics Example The following example produces Double Density Double Speed Bit Image graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image Mode example Note that the amount of data must be doubled for double density the data is used 54 times rather than 27 DOUBLE DENSITY DOUBLE SPEED BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS NANA Bit Image Mode Quadruple Density ASCII Code ESC Z n1 n2 Hex Code 1B 5A n1 n2 Dec Code 27 90 n1 n2 Purpose Selects Quadruple Density Bit Image graphics where n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment For detailed information see the Bit Image section in Chapter 8 Graphics The printed density in this mode is 120 dpi horizontal and 72 dpi vertical if selected when the Letter Gothic DP print mode is active 125 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Example The following example produces quadruple density graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image Mode example Note that the amount of data must be quadrupled for quadruple density
205. n with Control Codes Form Margins Set ASCII Code ESC v n1 n2 n3 n4 Hex Code 1B 76n1n2n3 n4 Dec Code 27 118 n1 n2 n3 n4 Purpose Selects left n1 right n2 top n3 and bottom n4 form margins where n1 The width of the left margin hex value in character columns at the current cpi If the requested margin is larger than the current form width right margin the value is ignored n2 The width of the right margin hex value in character columns at the current cpi If the requested margin is larger than the current form width left margin the value is ignored n3 The length of the top margin hex value in character lines at the current Ipi If the requested margin is larger than the current form length bottom margin the value is ignored n4 The length of the bottom margin hex value in character lines at the current Ipi If the requested margin is larger than the current form length top margin the value is ignored Comment A hex value of FF for n1 n2 n3 or n4 indicates that the margin remains unaffected When set the right and bottom margins take effect immediately The left margin takes effect for the current line only if no horizontal motion has occurred for the line otherwise it takes effect on the next line The top margin always takes effect on the next form Vertical tabs defined within the top and bottom margins are ignored Horizontal tabs are offset by the left margin and ignored w
206. nel 12 Reserved as the Vertical Tab channel The Vertical Tab code VT hex 0B prints any data in the print buffer and slews the paper to the next line identified by the channel 12 code If channel 12 is not loaded in the EVFU memory when a VT code is sent a single line feed is executed Channel 15 and 16 Used as general channel codes or filler channels only when the VFU is accessed by the PI signal line In an EVFU form that does not use the PI line the codes for Channels 15 and 16 function as the Start Load and End Load codes 287 Chapter 288 9 P Series EVFU End Load Code Hex 1F or 6F The end load code terminates the memory load program The end load code is hex 1F when the PI signal line is disabled low or hex 6F when the PI line is enabled high Channel codes in excess of 192 channels received prior to the end load code are discarded Using the EVFU Once the EVFU program has been enabled and loaded sending the appropriate channel code to the printer causes any data in the buffer to print and positions the paper to the next line on the form having the specified channel number assigned in EVFU memory For a data byte to be recognized as an EVFU instruction the following criteria must be met e The PI signal line must be enabled and set high and e Data bit 5 must be O not set OR e The PI signal line must be disabled or low and Data bit 5 must be 1 set Given these conditions the lowe
207. number The footer will be the DOWNLOAD END command The operator should be aware that the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD commands use a secondary copy of the menu structure which does not affect the printer s active configuration This allows the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD commands to operate without affecting the printer s current configuration If the operator intends to use one of the DOWNLOADed configurations the operator should reboot the printer to ensure proper operation This can be accomplished by adding the RESET command as the last command in your setup file This is necessary because the printer caches the active 302 Commands configuration Rebooting the printer ensures that the desired configuration is correctly read from Non Volatile RAM NOTE While an upload or download is in progress the Front Panel will be unavailable The Configuration Save and Delete commands from the front panel can be blocked by using the Protect Configurations feature This is intended to prevent someone from inadvertently reconfiguring a printer The PTR_SETUP commands however will override the protect configurations feature All PTR_SETUP commands will be honored regardless of the value of the Protect Configurations feature Operation of the FILE IO Command When a file is opened for writing with the FILE_IO CAPTURE filename command the system will allocate RAM for file control blocks and 1 Kbyte for data If the file already exists on the Flash File Syste
208. ode SSCC 119 n159 n2 where n2 image width four ASCII digits Table 54 Image Width n1 Value ASCII Units of n2 0 Current CPI 1 Inches 2 Centimeters 218 Linefeed ASCII Code SSCC X n Hex Code SSCC 58n Dec Code SSCC88n Print Engine Options Purpose Moves a linefeed of n printer resolution n must be in the range of 001 through 999 This command does not affect the current LPI setting The movement is a linefeed of n the native printer resolution which is not part of the command Media Handling ASCII Code SSCC M n Hex Code SSCC4Dn Dec Code SSCC77n Purpose Defines how the printer handles the media See Table 55 for valid values Table 55 Media Handling n Value ASCII Meaning 0 1 Continuous paper Tear Off Strip Move paper out after data timeout move paper back in when more data is received Tear Off Move paper out after printing one page and wait for it to be torn off Peel Off Move paper out after printing one page and wait for it to be peeled Other values of n disable peel off mode Paper Cut Enable paper cut command which cuts after printing the page Media Sensor ASCII Code SSCC s n Hex Code SSCC 73n Dec Code SSCC 115n where n Number of sensor to enable one ASCII digit in range 1 through 7 n 0 Disable label sensor s 219 Chapter 7 TheSuper Set Commands Off Line ASCII Code SSCC U Hex Code SSCC 55 Dec Code SS
209. odes IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation 145 Print Count Print engine options 222 Super Set 332 Print engine options Calibrate 217 Clip page 217 Error recover 218 Horizontal image shift 218 Image width 218 Linefeed Linefeed Print engine options 219 Media handling 219 Media sensor 219 Off line 220 Paper cut 220 Paper feed shift 220 Paper length 221 Plot attributes 221 Power saver time 222 Print count 222 Print intensity 222 Print mode 223 Print speed 223 Reboot 223 Slew speed 223 Super Set Programming 217 Tear strip time 224 Vertical image shift 224 Print intensity 222 Print Modes for Character Sets Epson FX 1050 Emulation 160 Print Mode Print engine options 223 Print Mode Pitch Selection P Series Emulation 54 Serial Matrix Emulation 108 Print One Control Code IBM Proprinter Ill XL Emulation 145 Print Speed Print engine options 223 Printer Deselect Epson FX 1050 Emulation 191 Serial Matrix Emulation 112 Printer Protocol Select Super Set Programming 225 Printer Select Epson FX 1050 Emulation 191 Serial Matrix Emulation 112 Printer configuration 19 Printing Hex Codes 00 1F and 80 9F Epson FX 1050 Emulation 175 P Series compatible plot mode Graphics 278 P Series Emulation attribute set 26 backspace 28 Bell 28 bold print 29 bold print reset 29 carriage return 30 character set select 31 Characters 80 9F Control Codes 33 Character
210. of four bars using combinations of Full Height Ascender Descender and Trackers It also adds start and stop bar codes as well as a check digit PostBar allows you complete flexibility to specify the individual bar types that comprise the signal For PostBar you are responsible for encoding the address adding the start and stop codes and supplying the appropriate check digit Quiet Zone The bar code structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which is a2mm border on each side of the bar code Start Stop Code The start and stop bars identify the orientation of the bar code Data Field For PostBar a variable length data field of digits O through 3 are allowed to represent the bars Full Height 0 Ascender 1 Descender 2 and Tracker 3 For Royal Mail the data is restricted to alphanumeric characters A through z and 0 through 9 Each bar width is equal and must be 020 inch 005 inch Horizontal spacing between bars pitch must be 22 bars 2 bars per inch over any 0 50 inch portion of the bar code The height of the bars Full Height has a maximum of 0 230 inches and a minimum of 0 165 inches POSTNET Check Digit For PostBar you are responsible for encoding and check digit For Royal Mail a modulo 6 check digit is inserted at the end of the data field POSTNET The POSTNET bar code structure is illustrated in Figure 19 and described on the following pages The POS
211. of saying turn on and turn off select and deselect or enable and disable Some printer features are set and reset with an escape sequence and the numbers 1 or 0 In such cases you can represent 1 and 0 as hexadecimal codes 01 and 00 or as the ASCII codes for the numerals 1 and 0 hexadecimal 31 and 30 NUL Code NUL hex 00 is ignored by the printer and can be used as a fill character however it can not be used to add blank spaces since it is not a space character NUL can also be used as a parameter terminator for the Set Horizontal Tabs page 181 or Set Vertical Tabs multibyte control code page 203 NOTE Hex 80 in the 0437 PC Character Set and Hex 7F in the 0850 PC Character Set are treated as a NUL however these two controls can not be used as parameter terminators 159 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Print Modes Supported for Character Sets Table 38 summarizes which print modes are supported for the Epson FX 1050 emulation character sets Additional information about character set support is provided in the Notes column of the table NOTE The print mode support for the languages shown in Table 38 Epson Set ASCII and following is the same for the Epson expanded character sets and the Epson 0437 PC character sets Table 38 Character Set Print Mode Support Letter Character Set Courier Gothic Notes 0437 PC Character Set X X 0850 PC Multilingual X X OC
212. of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing end of the bar code The start stop code is automatically produced with each bar code The start stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code scanning Codabar Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent standard alphanumeric characters Each wide or narrow bar or space is one element each character in the data field has nine elements The structure is three wide elements bars or spaces out of the nine total elements which compose one character Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The optional modulo 43 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate scanning Table 66 Codabar Character Set Character Hex Character Hex 0 0 24 1 1 3A 2 2 2F 3 3 2E 4 4 2B 5 5 A 41 6 6 B 42 7 7 C 43 8 8 D 44 9 9 2D 235 Chapter 7 Bar Codes Code 39 The Code 39 structure is shown in Figure 14 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT I UPPER GUARD BAND l ES giis l I QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET m LOWER GUARD BAND I I L J OPTIONAL
213. ol code ESC 0 is received all lines are printed at 8 Ipi until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting The value of n should be 9 if using ESC A n The following example illustrates 1 8 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC O SETS LINE SPACING AT 1 8 8 LPI INCH FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED 105 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Line Spacing 7 72 Inch ASCII Code ESC 1 Hex Code 1B 31 Dec Code 27 49 Purpose Specifies the line spacing at 7 72 inch 10 3 Ipi increments Comment When the 7 72 inch line spacing control code is received all lines are printed at the 7 72 inch line spacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting and the message display reflects the line spacing as 10 3 lines per inch Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript overlapping lines may occur Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap Example The following example illustrates 7 72 inch line spacing Ri Q9 E C 1 SETS sdb PRESE Ao THER SPRUNG I Y55set ECTED Line Spacing n 72 Inch ASCII Code ESCA n Hex Code 1B41n Dec Code 276
214. om of the form are cleared Forms length is defined in inches therefore subsequent line spacing changes do not affect the result of this command In INCHES mode incorrect values produce an error message Command Line Error Messages are listed in Table 2 on page 25 Forms length can also be set by the control panel when Menu Form Size is enabled The control code forms length setting from the host computer overrides the control panel setting However if the VFU is enabled and loaded this command is ignored Also 0 5 inch increments can be specified For example sending the command SFCC INCHES 7 5 results in a form length setting of 7 1 2 inches 45 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Forms Length Set Lines ASCII Code SFCC LINES n Purpose Sets the length of a form paper in lines where n 1 through 192 hex 01 through CO to specify the number of lines per page at the current line spacing Comment The forms length is set to the number of lines defined by the quotient of n and the current line spacing so that the units are in inches In LINES mode the maximum form length is 24 inches and n values in excess of 24 inches causes an error message Command Line Error Messages are listed in Table 2 on page 25 If the calculated forms length in lines is not an exact multiple of the target machine dot size the forms length value is adjusted down to the next possible multiple
215. on 49 Line Spacing P Series XQ Emulation 71 LinePrinter Plus introduction 17 M Manual about 17 caution 17 glossary 17 special information 17 warnings 17 Margins Left Right IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation 144 Master Print Select Epson FX 1050 Emulation 189 Maxicode Bar Code 250 Media Handling Print engine options 219 Media Sensor Print engine options 219 MSI Bar Code 252 N NUL Code Epson FX 1050 Emulation 159 P Series XQ Emulation 65 331 O Odd Dot Plot P Series Emulation 53 P Series XQ Emulation 73 Off Line Print engine options 220 Overlay download character set 36 Overscoring IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 145 P Series Emulation 52 Serial Matrix Emulation 108 P Page Orientation Selection Programming 215 Paper Cut Print engine options 220 Paper Feed Shift Print engine options 220 Paper Length Print engine options 221 Paper Out Detection Disable Epson FX 1050 Emulation 190 Paper Out Detection Enable Epson FX 1050 Emulation 190 Pass Bit 7 From Host Epson FX 1050 Emulation 190 PCX Data Super Set Programming 214 PDF 417 Bar Code 253 Plot Even dot 53 Odd dot 53 Plot Attributes Print engine options 221 Plot data byte format Graphics 279 Plot data line format Graphics 280 Plot density Graphics 278 Plotting data Graphics 282 PostBar and Royal Mail Bar Code 254 POSTNET Bar Code 255 Power Saver Time Print engine options 222 Print Control C
216. on Volatile Memory NVM at a time The VFU table format is VFU type lpi and VFU channel data Load Upon printer power up or printer reset a previously saved VFU is loaded if the saved VFU table matches the VFU type Upon loading the VFU lpi is set to the value stored in the VFU table if the saved VFU was loaded using the 6 or 8 Ipi DVFU or NVFU Start Load code Save From the control panel VFU TABLE SAVE writes the current VFU table into Non Volatile memory Skip over perforation and forms length values are not saved from this selection Clear The VFU can be cleared by any of the following e Pressing ENTER at the VFU TABLE CLEAR configuration menu e Sending a Reset control code SFCC in the printer data stream e Changing the printer protocol e Changing VFUs e Loading parameters e Loading a new VFU format When DISABLE is selected as the VFU type the previously loaded VFU data is not cleared and is still in effect if reselected 286 Start Load Code Hex 1E or 6E P Series EVFU The EVFU may be selected in the P Series and P Series XQ protocols The EVFU provides 14 or 16 channels to identify up to 192 lines depending on the paper instruction The programming sequence is 1 Send the start load code 2 Send the line identification codes 3 Send the end load code Start Load Code Hex 1E or 6E The start load code clears and initializes the EVFU memory for the memory load program The start load code is h
217. one line only Elongated characters are approximately double height but standard width The elongated character control code is a line by line print attribute when the control code is received one entire line of elongated characters is printed and then automatically reset When using this feature with relative line slewing the paper position is moved n 1 lines rather than n lines See Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting for more information on relative line slewing When using small line spacing and the lines overlap an unexpected print format may result The following sample illustrates elongated character printing CONTROL CODE ESC h SELECTS ELONGATED CHARACTER PRINTING FOR ONE LINE ONLY 95 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Elongated Double High Print Set Reset ASCII Code ESC wn Hex Code 1B77n Dec Code 27119n Purpose Turns double high character printing on and off Double high characters are standard width but twice as high where n hex 1 or hex 31 turns double high printing on n hex 0 or hex 30 turns double high printing off Comment The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in double high NOTE It is recommended to use double Line Feeds and Carriage Returns when double high character printing is on after an ESC w control code has been sent or else the printer overstrikes text that has already printed If Superscript Subscript ESC S or Condensed Print S
218. ons may be available with your printer Consult the User s Manual for your printer to determine which options are available If an option is not available the emulation ignores the corresponding command Calibrate ASCII Code SSCC D Hex Code SSCC 44 Dec Code SSCC 68 Purpose Calibrate the media sensor Clip Page ASCII Code SSCC b n Hex Code SSCC62n Dec Code SSCC 98n Purpose Enables or disables clipping the page at the end of a label Only valid if the media sensor is set to reflective or transmissive Table 52 Clip Page n Value ASCII Meaning 0 Clip page disabled 1 Clip page enabled 217 Chapter 7 TheSuper Set Commands Error Recover ASCII Code SSCCz n Hex Code SSCC7An Dec Code SSCC 122n Table 53 Error Recover n Value ASCII Meaning 1 If an error occurs while printing a page the printer makes an attempt to reprint that page 0 No attempt is made to reprint a page in the event of an error Horizontal Image Shift ASCII Code SSCC n Hex Code SSCC 23 2D n Dec Code SSCC 35 45 n Purpose Shifts image left or right in 1 1000 inches The brackets around the symbol indicate it is optional do not use these brackets in the command where shifts the image left No will shift the image right n thousandths of inches to shift the image horizontally range 0000 through 1000 Image Width ASCII Code SSCCw n1 n2 Hex Code SSCC77n13Bn2 Dec C
219. ont 194 Select User Defined Fonnt 195 Select Vertical Tab Channel 195 Set Absolute Horizontal Print Position in 1 60 Inch 195 Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes Io 196 Set Intercharacter Spacing in n 120 Inch eseese 196 Set Margin Let 196 Set Margin Te Lu dette rete Codd tet ehe ee tena 197 Set Forms Length by Lines sseseeeseeeseesreesrreeireerrerrrssrrserreenns 197 Set Forms Length in Inches sseeeeseessreesrreerieerrrerrrsrrserrern 198 Set Relative Horizontal Print Position in n 120 Inch 198 Set Vertical Tabs in Channels ssnnnnnennesnoeeeeninnnnnnsnnnnennnnnnnnnae 199 Skip Over Perforation ssseseeeererreriisirerirerierinisrinerrsrinsrnerinrennt 199 Table of Contents Skip Over Perforation Cancel 200 Super Set Commande 200 Superscript and Subscript Printing 201 Superscript and Subscript Printing Cancel 201 Underline n et ee eosin 202 Unidirectional Printing 1 Line ssesssseseee 202 Unidirectional Printing Set Reset ssesssseneneserneenrrresseernrsserren 202 Vertical Tab Execute ccccccccsssseeceeseceeeseeeeeseeseaseeeeetsnaeaseeeeeees 203 Vertical Tab GeticClear n 203 7 Super Set Programming sssoo000eennnneneeeoooreeeeen 205 Introduction iin ettet e tees esee rhe ded edis 205 The Super Set Commande sss 205 Character Set Selection sssss
220. or 6F P Series EVFU 288 Epson character sets Epson FX 1050 Emulation 157 Epson FX 1050 Emulation Backspace 164 Bell 164 Cancel line 165 Carriage return 165 Character pitch 10 cpi 165 Character pitch 12 cpi 165 Line Epson FX 1050 Epson FX 1050 327 Character pitch 15 cpi 166 Clear bit 7 of incoming data bytes to 0 168 Condensed print 168 Condensed print reset 169 Control code descriptions 158 Control code index 161 Control codes 158 Cut sheet paper feed control 169 default values 154 Define a download character 169 Delete character 169 differences 156 Double high print set reset 170 Double strike 171 Double strike cancel 171 Double wide print 172 Double wide print 1 line 173 Double wide print 1 line cancel 173 Emphasized print 174 Emphasized print cancel 174 Epson character sets 157 Escape sequences 158 exceptions 156 Form feed 177 Graphics double density 178 Graphics double density double speed 179 Graphics quadruple density 180 Graphics standard density 177 Half speed mode on off 180 Hex 80 9F control codes 187 Hex 80 9F printable 187 Horizontal tab execute 181 Horizontal tab set release 181 Initialize printer 182 International languages 166 Italic character set 193 Italic printing 182 Italic printing cancel 182 Line feed 183 Line feed n 216 inch 183 Line spacing n 216 inch 186 Line spacing n 72 inch 185 328 Line spacing 1 6 inch
221. orm position to advance to the first tab position for PART NUMBER data Sending another VT moves the paper position to the second tab position for the PART NAME followed by a third VT to access the third tab position for the QUANTITY data Form Line Form Data Number Vertical Tabs Top of Form Part Number Part Name OAONDAARWN Quantity Figure 37 Sample Serial Matrix Vertical Tab Positions 293 Chapter 9 Serial Matrix VFU 294 COLUMN z c r jo UOS ajo a len A len Je M SE Kee bn SE Peso roh RR IRA gt O A U m r I T lt i Oo E Standard ASCII Character Set g CH g R Q J Rg Oo e o S el B7 B6 BITS P B4 B3 B2 B1 OCTAL DECIMAL HEX 123 7B uz be On np a E DN x mU p DEL N E 295 Appendix A Standard ASCII Character Set 296 B Overview PTR_SETUP Option The PTR_SETUP commands are a superset of commands which allows the printer to perform several tasks by parsing commands either stored in flash or sent to the printer by the host Commands range from re routing debug statements to downloading complete printer configurations The PTR SETUP Commands Some concepts to keep in mind are as follows 1 PTR SETUP commands are not emulation specific In a system with an IGP the IGP level emulation will process the PTR_SETUP commands In a system without an IGP the PTR SETUP commands will be
222. ost indicates the controlling computer since modern printers are themselves microprocessor controlled computer systems ipm Interface International Language Invoke Italic lpm Memory Nonvolatile memory inches per minute The speed at which graphics are plotted The hardware components used to link two devices by common physical interconnection signal and functional characteristics Character set in which characters have been rearranged according to a substitution table for use ina different country To put into effect or operation A type style in which characters are slanted This sentence is set in italics L lines per inch a measurement indicating the vertical spacing between successive lines of text For example 8 Ipi is 8 printed lines per vertical inch lines per minute A measurement indicating the number of lines printed per minute lpm usually defines the speed at which text prints M See RAM N Nonvolatile memory stores variables that must be preserved when the printer is turned off such as configuration parameters and printer usage statistics Nonvolatile memory is preserved because RAM is housed on the controller board which contains an independent battery operated power supply When printer power is turned off the battery supplies the power needed to keep stored data active Nonvolatile memory also includes storage on disk 317 Appendix E _ Glossary 318 NOVRAM
223. othic Gothic Gothic OCR A OCR B_ Gothic Gothic 0 30 1 31 2 32 3 33 4 34 5 35 6 36 7 37 8 38 0 30 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 1 31 12 12 12 12 12 2 32 13 13 13 13 13 3 33 15 15 15 15 15 4 34 17 17 17 17 17 e E 5 35 20 17 20 20 20 The hex values shown i e 0 and 30 are equal Either value can be used in your program expression The value of mis represented by the font choice line NOTE When using the Multinational character set in OCR A or OCR B print mode a unique character set is used Example The sample printout below shows a number of different print modes and pitch selections PRINT MODE AND OR PITCH SELECTION ESC X MN SELECTS THE PRINT MODE LETTER GOTHIC COURIER OR OCR AND CHARACTER PITCH IN CHARACTERS PER INCH CPI PRINTING IN LETTER GOTHIC CDP FONTS PRINTED IN DP 10 CPI PRINTED IN DP 12 CPI PRINTED IN DP 13 CPI PRINTED IN DP 15 CPI 56 Superscript Subscript Printing Superscript Subscript Printing ASCII Code SFCC S n Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example SFCC 53 n SFCC 83 n Selects superscript or subscript printing n 0 to enable superscript printing hex 00 or hex 30 n 1 to enable subscript printing hex 01 or hex 31 Superscript Subscript font prints at one half the normal vertical character height and at twice the normal vertical density When the superscri
224. otion control code LF VT CR etc SFCC printer reset CAN or SFCC W double wide print The following sample illustrates Expanded Print for one line only For another example of expanded printing see Expanded Double Wide Print on page 42 EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING FOR ONE LINE ONLY Extended Character Set ASCII Code SO Shift Out SFCC SOSFCC n SFCC A Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment OE SFCC OESFCC GE SFCC 34 14 SFCC 14SFCC 110 SFCC 52 Accesses the extended character set in the range hex AO through FF using codes hex 20 through 7F Used in 7 bit systems as if data bit 8 was set to 1 For example sending code hex 20 accesses the symbol at code point hex AO If a printable symbol is not available at the code point a space is printed SFCC 4 is not cancelled by the next paper motion command OE SFCC OE SFCC 6E are cancelled by paper motion 43 Chapter 44 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Example CONTROL CODE The following sample illustrates Extended Character Set ESC 4 SELECTS THE EXTENDED CHARACTER SET AND ESC 5 SELECTS THE PRIMARY CHARACTER SET WHICH IS DISPLAYED BENEATH THE EXTENDED CHARACTER SET AAAAAKCEEEEIf TIDNOO000x200 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ Extended Character Set Cancel Primary Character Set Select ASCII Code SI Shift In SFCC SISFCC o SFCC 5 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example OF SFCC OFSFCC GE SFCC 35 15 SFCC
225. owing the CR are printed over the previous characters on the line If identical characters are placed in the same position on the line those characters are printed in bold double strike print If the DEFINE CR CODE submenu displays Define CR Code CR CR LF control code CR is converted to perform a carriage return and line feed function The CR code cancels expanded double wide print when set by code SO single line printing attribute 128 Carriage Return Set Carriage Return Set ASCII Code ESC 5 n Hex Code 1B 35n Dec Code 2753n Purpose Defines the carriage return code where Ifn 1 3 5 any odd value CR CR LF This setting overrides the front panel setting If n 0 2 4 any even value CR CR This setting overrides the front panel setting Character Pitch 12 cpi ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B3A Dec Code 2758 Purpose Sets character pitch to 12 cpi Characters 80 9F Control Codes ASCII Code ESC 7 Hex Code 1B37 Dec Code 2755 Purpose Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 through 9F are control codes Cancels Character Set Select activated by ESC 6 Comment See the character set charts in Appendix D for the control codes Characters 80 9F Printable Symbols ASCII Code ESC 6 Hex Code 1B 36 Dec Code 2754 Purpose Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 through 9F are printable symbols Cancels Character Set Select activated by ESC 7 Comment Se
226. pacing until a new line spacing is selected or the printer is reset The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting The vertical character position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the current dot row spacing the remainder is added to the next paper motion command Caution should be used when combining this control code with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript overlapping lines may occur Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap Example The following example illustrates n 216 inch line spacing Control code ESC 3 50 sets line spacing at 50 216 inch increments for all subsequent lines until reset or another spacing is selected Margins Left Right Set ASCII Code ESC X n1 n2 Hex Code 1B58n1n2 Dec Code 2788n1n2 Purpose Sets the left n1 and right n2 margins n1 and n2are the margin positions in character columns which are based on the current cpi They have a range of 1 through 255 Any value that sets the right margin beyond the form width is ignored where if n1 0 the left margin is unaffected if n2 0 the right margin is unaffected 144 Overscoring Overscoring ASCII Code ESC _ n Hex Code 1B5Fn Dec Code 2795n Purpose Enables or disables automatic overscoring of all characters where if n 1 3
227. per movement Super Set Control Code The SSCC is used to activate the super set commands It consists of the SFCC plus the sequence The signal that indicates the start of a character or element The signal that indicates the end of a character or element Two or more bytes of data or code treated as a unit A table that contains the code points within a character set that need to be changed for an international language See character set T On or 1 High true refers to a positive relative voltage representing the ON state low true refers to a negative relative voltage representing the ON state Refers to either the upright roman or italic character style within a specific font family A descriptive name or brand name that identifies a particular design of type See font proportional W Weight See character weight Write To store data to memory or mass storage hard disk floppy diskette RAM etc 321 Appendix E _ Glossary 322 F Contact Information Printronix Customer Support Center IMPORTANT Please have the following information available prior to calling the Printronix Customer Support Center e Model number e Serial number located on the back of the printer e Installed options e interface and host type if applicable to the problem e Configuration printout Thermal Printer See Printing A Configuration in the Quick Setup Guide Line Matrix Printer Press PR
228. play A complete set of tables identifying pitch and dot densities for all print modes follows 54 Print Mode Pitch Selection Table 9 Print Mode and Pitch SFCC PMODE n Print Mode and Pitch o a A CO N Letter Gothic 10 cpi Letter Gothic 12 cpi Letter Gothic 15 cpi Courier 10 cpi Letter Gothic 10 cpi OCR A 10 cpi OCR B 10 cpi Table 10 Print Mode and Pitch SFCC nq n Print Mode and Pitch 1 hex 31 Courier 10 cpi 2 hex 32 Letter Gothic 10 cpi 3 hex 33 Letter Gothic 12 cpi 4 hex 34 Letter Gothic 12 cpi 5 hex 35 Letter Gothic 13 cpi Table 11 Horizontal and Vertical Dot Density SFCC X mn m Hex js kd Vertical Density Print Mode 0 30 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 1 31 X dpi y dpi Courier 2 32 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 3 33 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 4 34 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 5 35 X dpi y dpi OCR A 6 36 X dpi y dpi OCR B 7 87 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic 8 38 X dpi y dpi Letter Gothic The hex values shown i e 0 and 30 are equal Either value can be used in your program expression The density dpi remains the same under this setting x and y represent the resolutions of the particular printer 55 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Table 12 Print Mode and Character Pitches SFCC X mn Characters Per Inch value of n value of m Print Mode Gothic Courier G
229. ple or any other byte can be identified by its binary octal hexadecimal or decimal equivalent and subsequently can be used to generate a Bit Image pattern A table of the standard ASCII character set and equivalences is included in Appendix A Use this table to quickly identify the various equivalences of ASCII characters Bit Image plotting is not limited to printable ASCII characters bit image patterns can be plotted for any 8 bit data byte with decimal values ranging from 0 through 255 Plotting a Bit Image Pattern A Bit Image pattern can be developed as follows 1 Lay out the graphic to be printed on a quadrille pad or graph paper 2 Determine the decimal equivalence of each bit image data byte required to produce the pattern 3 Write a program to generate the complete pattern 4 Enter and run the program on the host computer Figure 29 illustrates steps 1 and 2 Eight vertical cells are used to create the Bit Image pattern corresponding to the eight bits of the vertically rotated data byte Dots are placed in the cells to provide a visual representation of the graphic to be printed Each dot corresponds to a 1 or true bit in the data byte In this example seven Bit Image data bytes are required to create the dot pattern These seven data bytes must be specified in the written program step 3 to generate the entire pattern 273 Chapter 8 Bit Image Graphics 1st Bit Image Data Byte 2nd Bit Image Data Byte D
230. point in the Character Library in Appendix C representing the substituted character selected lowercase a alpha 66 The decimal address code for the second character in the current character set that causes the substituted character to be printed uppercase B beta 225 The decimal symbol point in the Character Library Appendix C representing the substituted character selected lowercase b beta NOTE Not all fonts have all characters Characters are included only to support predefined character sets In general DP 10 and NLQ 10 have the widest coverage High Speed and OCR fonts have the least coverage The SFCC V and SFCC RX commands are not supported with the U terminator when UTF 8 is enabled See Table 8 below for details Table 8 E and U Terminator Support E Terminator U Terminator SFCC V supported not supported SFCC RX supported not supported 38 Elongated Double High Print One Line Only Elongated Double High Print One Line Only ASCII Code SFCCh BS Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example SFCC 68 08 SFCC 104 8 Selects elongated double high character printing for one line only Elongated characters are approximately double height but standard width The elongated character control code is a line by line print attribute when the control code is received one entire line of elongated characters is printed and then automatically reset When configured for
231. ps might appear For details concerning available modes see Chapter 4 Serial Matrix Printer Protocol Chapter 5 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Printer Protocol or Chapter 6 Epson FX 1050 Printer Protocol In Single Density Bit Image graphics from the Letter Gothic DP print mode printed dot density is 60 dots per inch dpi horizontally and 72 dpi vertically From the Courier NLQ print mode horizontal dot density is 120 dpi and vertical density is 144 dpi The Double Density mode prints up to twice the number of dots per inch horizontally up to 120 dpi from the Letter Gothic DP mode The vertical dot density remains the same as in the Single Density mode Double horizontal density requires twice the number of input data bytes to print the same length line as Single Density When the Double Density Double Speed control code is received the data can be printed at up to double the current horizontal dot density but all adjacent dots are removed which affects the final density of the printed image Quad Density characters are processed the same as Double Density characters Each character is stored in successive dot columns and successive pairs of data characters are logically OR ed together Quad horizontal density requires twice the number of input data bytes to print the same length line as Double Density 275 Chapter 276 8 Bit Image Graphics Bit Image Programming Format The syntax of the Bit Image expres
232. pson FX 1050 2 char 1 dot space Epson Emulation 2 char 1 dot space The Condensed Print SI control code condenses the character width but not the inter character spacing unlike the Epson FX 1050 which condenses both character width and spacing If one or more Backspace control codes follow directly after a Bit Image Graphics command ESC K ESC L ESC Y or ESC Z the printer backspaces into the graphic pattern the number of dots depending on the current cpi setting For an Epson FX 1050 printer one Backspace sends the logical printhead directly to the beginning of the graphics pattern When backspacing over proportionally spaced characters Epson printers move back the width of each proportional character this emulation moves back based on the current cpi setting as if proportional spacing is disabled DO U YF m Epson Character Sets Epson Character Sets Epson printers use five character sets The IBM Graphics Code Page 437 IBM PC Multilingual code page 0850 OCR A and OCR B character sets may be selected from the configuration menus In addition there is a unique Epson character set The Epson character set shown in Table 37 is basically the ASCII character set with the upper non ASCII set defined as italics and the usually unprintable codes designated as international characters Table 37 Epson Character Set 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 8 SP 0 P p SP 0 P D B 1 A Q a
233. pt is combined with Double High ESC w printing only Double High printing occurs Example The following sample illustrates superscript and subscript printing CONTROL CODE ESC S 0 SELECTS SUPERSCRIPT A2 B2 C2 CONTROL CODE ESC S 1 SELECTSsuescerretr 3lugx749prEc CONTROL CODE ESC T CANCELS SUPERSCRIPT SUBSCRIPT PRINTING Superscript and Subscript Printing Cancel ASCII Code ESC T Hex Code 1B54 Dec Code 2784 Purpose Cancels superscript and or subscript printing as set by ESC S n 201 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Underline ASCII Code ESC n Hex Code 1B2Dn Dec Code 2745n Purpose Turns automatic underlining on and off where n NUL or 0 hex 00 or hex 30 to turn off underlining n SOH or 1 hex 01 or hex 31 to turn on underlining Comment Spaces are underlined but graphics and grey scale characters are not Example The following sample illustrates underlining CONTROL CODE ESC 1 ENABLES AUTOMATIC UNDERLINING CONTROL CODE ESC O DISABLES AUTOMATIC UNDERLINING Unidirectional Printing 1 Line ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B3C Dec Code 2760 Purpose Causes printing to occur from left to right for one line only Comment The printer ignores this command Unidirectional Printing Set Reset ASCII Code ESCU n Hex Code 1B55n Dec Code 2785n Purpose Causes printing to occur in only one direction of shuttle movement left to right Comment
234. pt subscript control code is received all characters are superscript or subscript until reset by the superscript subscript reset control code or printer reset Emphasized print is ignored in the superscript subscript print mode When the BS feature is enabled from the control panel both superscript and subscript characters can be printed in the same character column using the Backspace BS control code page 28 Caution should be used when combining Superscript or Subscript printing with other print attributes such as Elongated Double High or small line spacing overlapping lines may occur Characters with different horizontal or vertical dot densities do not overlap The following sample illustrates superscript subscript printing CONTROL CODE ESC S 0 SELECTS SUPERSCRIPT A2 B2 C2 CONTROL CODE ESC S 1 SELECTS Scu SUBSCRIPT CONTROL CODE ESC T CANCELS SUPERSCRIPT SUBSCRIPT PRINTING Superscript Subscript Printing Reset ASCII Code SFCC T Hex Code SFCC 54 Dec Code SFCC 84 Purpose Resets superscript and subscript printing 57 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Super Set Commands ASCII Code SFCC Hex Code SFCC 7C 7D 3B Dec Code SFCC 124 125 59 Purpose Control code sequence used to introduce the super set commands Comment Super set commands affect the ASCII Emulation as a whole regardless of the printer protocol currently active The commands are sent from the host in
235. q B 1 A Q a q DC2 2 B R b r AE j 2 B R b r DC3 3 C S C S 3 C S c S H DC4 4 D T d t i 4 D T d t 5 E U e u P 5 E U e u amp 6 F V f V amp 6 F V f v BEL A 7 G w g w i 7 G wl g w BS CAN 8 H x h x 8 H X h x HT 9 l Y i y N U 9 l Y i y LF a Y J Z j Zz A a Hd J Z j Z VT ESC K k o 6 K k FF i lt L Pt j lt L I CR E M m A E M m SO i gt N A n a E N n Sl H O 23 o DEL O o g The international characters in 00 1F and 80 9F appear when you invoke control code ESC 1 You may use the Epson configuration menus described in your User s Manual or the ESC R control code to select an international character set Table 38 on page 160 provides information on print mode support for each character set Normally these characters are either blank or control codes The implementation is that the control codes hide the non italic international characters even in hex 00 through 1F and DEL DEL conceals the non italic slashed zero 157 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes IMPORTANT 158 The remainder of this chapter describes the Epson printer control language codes that may be sent from a host computer attached to the printer in order
236. que start code and a common stop code both automatically provided Data Field UPS 11 is a special case of Code 128 page 237 This bar code is restricted to 10 data characters The first character must be O through 9 or A through Z The remaining nine digits must be 0 through 9 Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The start code is included in the check digit algorithm 269 Chapter 7 Bar Codes 270 8 Introduction Graphics The ASCII Emulation is capable of standard Odd Even Dot Plotting for normal and high density graphics as well as Bit Image graphics with single density double density and quad density modes Odd Even dot plotting is available for graphics when the selected protocol is P Series or P Series XQ Bit Image graphics is used when the selected protocol is Serial Matrix Proprinter XL or Epson FX Printing text and characters is the default mode of operation Consequently each line of graphics data must include a graphics control code to enable the emulation for the desired graphics mode of operation NOTE Depending on the target machine dot size the plot dot size is adjusted automatically so that one plot dot has a horizontal and vert
237. r 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Backspace ASCII Code BS Hex Code 08 Dec Code 8 Purpose Moves the logical print head to the left one character space toward the first character column Comment Assures that the previous printable characters are printed then moves the logical print head one character space to the left at the current pitch setting which includes double wide and ESC SP If the logical print head bumps into the left margin it stops t When backspacing over proportionally spaced characters Epson printers move back the width of each proportional character this emulation moves back based on the current cpi setting as if proportional spacing is disabled t If one or more Backspace control codes follow directly after a Bit Image Graphics command ESC K ESC L ESC Y or ESC Z the printer backspaces into the graphic pattern the number of dots depending on the current cpi setting For an Epson FX 1050 printer one Backspace sends the logical printhead directly to the beginning of the graphics pattern Example If you were to print five T characters then two BS commands then two characters the output would look like the sample below TTT Bell ASCII Code BEL Hex Code 07 Dec Code 7 Purpose Sounds the printer s buzzer beeper Comment The BEL function sounds the buzzer beeper for 0 2 seconds upon receipt of this command 164 Cancel Line Cancel Line
238. r four bits of a byte specifies the EVFU channel number Table 78 lists the EVFU channels and their equivalent data bytes with the PI signal line enabled Table 79 lists the EVFU channels and their equivalent data bytes with the PI line disabled Table 78 P Series EVFU Codes PI Line Enabled Using the EVFU ASCII Data Bits Channel Hex Dec Code PI 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 00 0 NUL 1 x Xx Xx 0 0 0 0 0 1 TOF 01 1 SOH 1 X X X 0 0 0 0 1 2 02 2 STX 1 X X X 0 0 0 1 0 3 03 3 ETX 1 X X X 0 0 0 1 1 4 04 4 EOT 1 X X X 0 0 1 0 0 5 05 5 ENQ 1 X X X 0 0 1 0 1 6 06 6 ACK 1 X X X 0 0 1 1 0 7 07 7 BEL 1 X X X 0 0 1 1 1 8 08 8 BS 1 X X X 0 1 0 0 0 9 09 9 HT 1 X X X 0 1 0 0 1 10 OA 10 LF 1 X X X 0 1 0 1 0 11 0B 11 VT 1 x X X 0 1 0 1 1 12 VT oc 12 FF 1 X X X 0 1 1 0 0 13 oD 13 CR 1 X X X 0 1 1 0 1 14 OE 14 SO 1 X 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 15 OF 15 Sl 1 X 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 16 6E 110 n 1 X 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 Start Load 6F 111 0 1 X 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 End Load X Undefined 0 or 1 1 High 0 Low 289 Chapter 9 P Series EVFU Table 79 P Series EVFU Codes PI Line Disabled or Not Used ASCII Data Bits Channel Hex Dec Code 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 16 DLE o 0 0 3 o 0 oO 0 1 TOF 11 17 DC1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 2 12 18 DC2 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 3 13 19 DC3 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 4 14 20 DC4 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 5 15 21 NAK 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 6 16 22 SYN 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 7 17 23 ETB 0 0 0
239. re ASCII values where d the barcode delimiter which can be any character where data variable length printable data field 228 Bar Code Format NOTE The following parameters are optional where where N activates the offset n the x and y coordinate unit system Table 63 x and y Coordinate Unit System n ASCII Selects Value 0 use current cpi and lpi values 1 use 1 4 inch value 2 use 1 2 centimeter value 1 2 54 x 2 3 use 1 millimeter value 1 25 4 4 use Letter Gothic LG dot value hor 1 120 inch x vert 1 72 inch where XXXx four digit upper left corner x horizontal axis where yyyy four digit upper left corner y vertical axis where X activates magnification where mmmm magnification value Valid values are X1 X1 5 X1A X1B X2 X2A X3 and X4 where P activates printable data field variable where p location of printable data field Table 64 Printable Data Field P Selects Location ASCII Hex A 41 above B 42 below default N 4E none where C calculate and plot check digit if available as an option The default is no check digit if the check digit is allowed to be optional where H activates the height variable where hh two digit bar code height in 1 10 inches The default is as specified in the individual bar code specifications 229 Chapter 7 Bar Codes where D activates dark bar code Comment The x and y values are added
240. re ignored If values of n are not in ascending order the sequence up to and including the out of sequence number is ignored and the rest of the load is processed Skip over perforation is ignored This command always sets channel 0 You can clear channel 0 by sending ESC B NUL See also the channel selection command ESC and the channel loading command ESC b 203 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes 204 2 Super Set Programming Introduction This chapter describes the super set commands Super set commands affect each of the protocols included in the ASCII Emulation regardless of the printer protocol currently active except for the P Series XQ Variant emulation The commands are sent through the host in the input data stream and enact the features described in the following subsections NOTE The super set commands do not affect the P Series XQ Variant emulation The Super Set Commands Each printer protocol uses a unique control code sequence to introduce the super set commands called the Super Set Control Code SSCC Table 44 Super Set Control Codes Protocol SE nee ASCII Value Hex Value P Series SFCC SFCC 7C 7D 3B P Series XQ N A N A Serial Matrix ESC ESC 7C 7D 3B Epson FX ESC ESC 7C 7D 3B Proprinter IIl XL ESC ESC 7C 7D 3B The SFCC in P Series is the currently active Special Function Control Code NOTE The super set commands ar
241. re set HT moves the logical print head to the next tab stop Sending ESC initializes the printer and resets the tabs to every eighth character column which is the default In proportional mode the size of 10 cpi characters determines tab positions The following example illustrates how to set horizontal tabs CONTROL CODE ESC D CHR 4 CHR C10 CHR 0 SETS TAB STOPS AT COLUMNS 4 AND 10 CONTROL CODE HT ACCESSES THE TAB STOPS AS FOLLOWS COLUMN 4 COLUMN 10 181 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Initialize Printer ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B 40 Dec Code 27 64 Purpose Resets all print related parameters to their power up configuration values Comment Print mode line spacing international language selection margins form length skip over perforation and character pitch are reset to their power up configuration Character by character and line by line attributes are canceled The vertical format unit is cleared The current line is set to the top of form position Interface parameters and printer protocol selection are not affected This command resets the horizontal tabs to every eighth character column Italic Printing ASCII Code ESC 4 Hex Code 1B34 Dec Code 2752 Purpose Turns on italic character printing Comment Character graphics IBM graphic set hex BO through DF and FO through FE cannot be italicized ESC 4 TURNS ON ITALIC CHARACTER PRINTING ESC 5 T
242. re set and reset this way NOTE Some control code functions can be accomplished using another control code sequence or via control panel selection FUNCTION Paper Motion Form Feed Line Feed Vertical Tab Page Format Backspace Carriage Return Forms Length Set Inches Forms Length Set Lines Form Margins Set Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi Line Spacing 8 or 10 3 Ipi 1 line only Line Spacing 7 72 Inch Line Spacing n 72 Inch Line Spacing n 216 Inch VFU Commands This index lists each printer command by function ASCII mnemonic and the page where the command is explained in detail The rest of this chapter defines the control code functions for P Series Emulation mode The commands are listed in alphabetical order ASCII CODE PAGE FF 45 LF 47 VT 59 BS 28 CR 30 SFCC INCHES n f 45 SFCC LINES n 46 SFCC v 46 SFCC 2 48 SFCC LPI n SFCC 0 49 SFCC LPI n ACK 49 SFCC f SFCC 1 50 SFCC A 51 SFCC 3 52 DLE through US Print Attributes Bold Print Bold Print 1 line only Bold Print Reset Elongated Double High Print 1 line Elongated Double High Print Set Reset Emphasized Print Emphasized Print Reset Expanded Double Wide Print Expanded Double Wide Print 1 line Overscoring Print Mode Pitch Selection FUNCTION Print Attributes continued Superscript Subscript Printing Superscript Subscript Printing Reset Underline Graphics Plot Even
243. reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start and stop codes identify the leading and trailing ends of the bar code UCC EAN 128 uses unique start codes for character subsets B and C anda stop code common to both An automatic mode switching feature is used to generate the correct start code based on the first four data field characters Data Field UCC EAN 128 bar codes require a special character called Function 1 FNC1 to immediately follow the start code ASCII Emulation automatically supplies this character so it must not be included in the data field by the user A character is made up of three bars and three spaces each varying in width from 1 through 4 modules for a total of eleven modules The number of modules making up the bars is even The stop code has four bars and is 13 modules wide The character set for UCC EAN 128 is the same as the character set for Code 128 See the Code 128 Character Set Table 69 on page 242 Every character is interpreted according to the currently active character subset UCC EAN 128 uses subset B and subset C only Subset B shown in Table 70 on page 243 includes all standard alphanumeric keyboard characters lowercase alphabetical characters and special characters Subset C interprets the characters as pairs of numbers 00 through 99 along with some special
244. rforation and character pitch are reset to their power up configuration Character by character and line by line attributes are canceled The vertical format unit is cleared The current line is set to the top of form position Interface parameters and printer protocol selection are not affected This command resets the horizontal tabs to every eighth character column 97 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Expanded Double Wide Print ASCII Code ESC W n Hex Code 1B57n Dec Code 2787n Purpose Selects or resets expanded double wide print where n 1 selects expanded print hex 01 or hex 31 n 0 resets expanded print hex 00 or hex 30 Comment When expanded print using ESC W is received all characters are printed double wide until reset by the Expanded Print Reset control code Emulation Reset or DCA Also refer to control code SO and ESC SO Expanded Double Wide Print for one line only Example The following sample illustrates expanded character printing and expanded character printing reset CONTROL CODE ESC W 1 SELECTS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE ESC W O RESETS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only ASCII Code SO ESC SO Hex Code 0E 1B 0E Dec Code 14 27 14 Purpose Selects expanded double wide print for one line only Comment This expanded print control code is a line by line print attribute when the SO or E
245. rinting CONTROL CODE ESC G SELECTS BOLD CHARACTER PRINTING FOR EXAMPLE AaBbCcDdEeF fGgHhI iJ jKkL 1 MnNnOoPp CONTROL CODE ESC H CANCELS BOLD CHARACTER PRINTING 86 Bold Print Reset Bold Print Reset ASCII Code ESC H Hex Code 1B 48 Dec Code 27 72 Purpose Resets bold character printing Comment The bold print reset control code only resets the bold print character attribute Other print attributes such as double wide printing are not affected Example Refer to the Bold Print control code for a sample of bold character print set and reset Cancel ASCII Code CAN Hex Code 18 Dec Code 24 Purpose Clears the print buffer of all printable symbols since the last paper motion command was received Comment This control code may be used as a delete line function but should be used with extreme care to avoid possible misprinting This control code cancels the double wide attribute set by SO if active No other print attributes are affected 87 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Carriage Return ASCII Code CR Hex Code OD Dec Code 13 Purpose Returns the logical print head to the first character column resets the pointer to the first character position Comment The CR code may or may not cause printing or paper motion depending on the DEFINE CR CODE configuration parameter value If the DEFINE CR CODE submenu displays Define CR Code CR CH the char
246. rol code index 65 Control codes 64 default values 62 Delete 69 Edit mode 64 Electronic Vertical Format Unit 69 Elongated characters 70 Even dot plot 72 Form feed 70 introduction 61 333 Line feed 71 Line spacing 71 NUL code 65 Odd dot plot 73 Select letter gothic 73 Space 74 states 62 Underline 74 Vertical tab 75 PTR_Setup Commands 297 CONFIG command summary 302 Operation of the FILE IO command 303 Overview 297 R Reassign Graphics Mode FX 1050 Emulation 191 Reboot Print engine options 223 Relative Horizontal Print Position in n 120 Inch Epson FX 1050 Emulation 198 Relative line slewing P Series EVFU 291 Remove Downloaded Characters Epson FX 1050 Emulation 192 Reset Codes Epson FX 1050 Emulation 159 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 120 P Series Emulation 26 Serial Matrix Emulation 80 S Select Attributes IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 146 Select Font IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 148 Select Graphics Mode Epson FX 1050 Emulation 192 Select letter gothic P Series XQ Emulation 73 Select Print Quality Epson FX 1050 Emulation 194 Select Proportional Spacing IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 148 Select 9 pin Graphics Mode Epson FX 1050 Emulation 193 Epson 334 Select Deselect Proportional Spacing Epson FX 1050 Emulation 194 Serial Matrix Emulation Attribute Set Codes 80 Backspace 83 Bell 83 Bit Image Mode Double Density 84 Bit Image Mode Do
247. rst input in the sequence of parameters The general control code sequence is SFCC parameter 1 parameter 2 parameter n P Series codes can use any value from 1 through 255 hex 01 through hex FF as control code introducers For example bold print can be enabled in the P Series protocol using any of the following control code introducers ASCII SOH G Hex 01 47 Dec 171 ETX G 03 47 371 ESC G 1B 47 27 71 AG 5E 47 94 71 G 7E 47 126 71 NOTE The SFCC has been set to ESC for all examples Command Line Command Line Print format print mode or international language selection can be controlled by a longer sequence known as a Command Line Command Lines are string type commands placed between complete lines of text and affect the text which follows The protocol has six Command Lines PMODE OSET PSET LPI LINES and INCHES Each of these Command Lines is discussed in this chapter under the appropriate Control Code function For example the form length in inches can be set using the following command line SFCC INCHES n f where nis the whole number of inches and fis the fractional increment in 0 5 inch increments When using the SFCC in a Command Line the SFCC must be the first non blank symbol in the line space hex 20 is a blank symbol In addition characters following spaces other than a valid line terminator in a Command Line are ignored so that user comments can be included on the Command Line The
248. s 80 9F Printable Symbols 33 Command line 25 control code header 24 control code reference index 26 control codes 24 Control codes descriptions 24 default values 22 Elongated print 39 Elongated print set reset 40 EMCA 94 Latin 1 Extended 34 Emphasized print 41 Emphasized print reset 41 Emulation reset 42 Even dot plot 53 Expanded print 42 Expanded print one line only 43 Extended character set 43 Extended character set cancel 44 Form feed 45 Form margins set 46 Forms length set 45 Forms length set lines 46 International languages 35 introduction 21 Line feed 47 Line spacing n 216 inch 52 Line spacing n 72 inch 51 Line spacing 1 6 inch 48 Line spacing 1 8 inch 49 Line spacing 7 72 inch 50 Line spacing 8 or 10 3 Ipi 49 Odd dot plot 53 Overscoring 52 Print mode Pitch selection 54 reset codes 26 special function control code 24 states 22 Superscript subscript printing 57 Superscript subscript printing reset 57 Super set commands 58 Underlines 58 Vertical tab 59 VFU commands 59 P Series EVFU 287 Channel assignment 287 Clear EVFU memory 290 End Load Code Hex 1F or 6F 288 Programming Information 285 Relative line slewing 291 Start Load Code Hex 1E or 6E 287 Using the EVFU 288 P Series Plot Byte 311 P Series XQ Emulation Alternate character set deselect 66 Alternate character set select 67 Carriage return 67 Compressed print 68 Control code descriptions 64 Cont
249. s EVFU channel codes As long as the EVFU is selected this type of vertical paper motion occurs regardless of whether the EVFU memory is loaded or not If the Double High for One Line attribute is active n 1 lines are slewed rather than n lines 291 Chapter 9 Serial Matrix VFU Table 80 P Series EVFU Line Slewing ASCII Data Bits Lines Slewed Hex Dec Code PI 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 16 DLE 1 X X X 1 0 0 0 0 1 11 17 DC 1 X X X 1 0 0 0 1 2 12 18 DC2 1 X X X 1 0 0 1 0 3 13 19 DC3 1 X X X 1 0 0 1 1 4 14 20 DC4 1 X X X 1 0 1 0 0 5 15 21 NAK 1 X X X 1 0 1 0 1 6 16 22 SYN 1 X X X 1 0 1 1 0 7 17 23 ETB 1 X X X 1 0 1 1 1 8 18 24 CAN 1 X X X 1 1 0 0 0 9 19 25 EM 1 X X X 1 1 0 0 1 10 1A 26 SUB 1 X X X 1 1 0 1 0 11 1B 27 ESC 1 X X X 1 1 0 1 1 12 1C 28 FS 1 X X X 1 1 1 0 0 13 1D 29 GS 1 X X X 1 1 1 0 1 14 1E 30 RS 1 X 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 15 1F 31 US 1 X 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 16 X Undefined 0 or 1 1 High 0 Low Serial Matrix VFU 292 In the Serial Matrix Proprinter XL and Epson FX protocols the VFU is basically a set of preprogrammed vertical tabs Various lines of the form are assigned vertical tabs which are then accessed by control code for rapid vertical paper movement slewing to the tab position Two control codes are used for the Serial mode VFU ESC B for single channel tab setting and VT to execute a vertical tab These codes and the parameters surrounding their use are describe
250. s and spaces They are automatically produced Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to represent numeric characters The structure is 2 wide elements bars or spaces and 3 narrow elements Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data Bar code data is printed below the horizontal bar code symbol The lower guard band is provided when the readable data field is selected Check Digit The modulo 10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit provides the means to verify accurate scanning 268 UPS 11 UPS 11 The UPS 11 structure is shown in Figure 25 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT SR SC POSITION 9 wee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee e rm 1 T l UPPER GUARD BAND I Ee imu l I QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET d l LOWER GUARD BAND l l L OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 25 UPS 11 Structure Quiet Zone Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones The quiet zones must be at least 0 25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from overlapping Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones Start Stop Codes The start stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code Each of the UPS 11 subsets uses a uni
251. s the command Form Length and Width The following command sets the form length ASCII Code SSCC KL i n m n I n Hex Code SSCC 4B 4C 69 n 6D n 6C n 2E Dec Code SSCC 75 76 105 n 109 n 108 n 46 Comment The brackets indicate optional parameters in the command string Do not include the brackets in your command Only one parameter may be used per command where i n sets the form length in inches nis the number of inches and can be any number of digits but is limited by the maximum form length m n sets the form length in millimeters n is the number of millimeters and can be any number of digits but is limited by the maximum form length n sets the form length in number of lines n is the number of lines and can be any number of digits but is limited by the maximum form length period is the command terminator The following command sets the form width ASCII Code SSCC K W i n m n c n Hex Code SSCC 4B 57 69 n 6D n 63 n 2E Dec Code SSCC 75 87 105 n 109 n 99 n 46 212 Comment Comment Host Form Size The brackets indicate optional parameters in the command string Do not include the brackets in your command Only one parameter may be used per command where i nsets the form width in inches nis the number of inches and can be any number of digits but is limited by the maximum form width m n sets the form width in millimeters n is the number of millimeters and can be an
252. sample illustrates double high character printing CONTROL CODE ESC w 1 SELECTS DOUBLE HIGH PRINTING ESC w 0 CANCELS DOUBLE HIGH PRINTING 170 Double Strike Double Strike ASCII Code ESC G Hex Code 1B 47 Dec Code 27 71 Purpose Makes text bolder by selecting a bold font Comment This command makes text bolder by selecting a bold font Example The following sample illustrates bold character printing CONTROL CODE ESC G SELECTS BOLD CHARACTER PRINTING FOR EXAMPLE AaBbCcDdEeFfGgHhI iJ jKkL 1MmNnOoPp CONTROL CODE ESC H CANCELS BOLD CHARACTER PRINTING Double Strike Cancel ASCII Code ESC H Hex Code 1B 48 Dec Code 27 72 Purpose Turns off the double strike printing set by ESC G or ESC I Comment This control code resets only the double strike print attribute Other print attributes such as double wide printing are not affected 171 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Double Wide Print ASCII Code ESCW n Hex Code 1B57n Dec Code 2787n Purpose Turns double wide print on and off where n hex 1 or hex 31 turns double wide print on n hex 0 or hex 30 turns double wide print off Comment When ESC W is received all characters are printed twice as wide until reset This command overrides SO ESC SO and DC4 The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in double wide T Like the Epson FX 1050 this control code doubles the character width Unlike the Ep
253. scoring of all characters where n 0 to disable automatic overscoring hex 00 or hex 30 n 1 to enable automatic overscoring hex 01 or hex 31 Comment When automatic overscore is enabled all characters including Spaces are overscored until disabled 52 Example Plot Even Dot P Series High Density Graphics The following sample illustrates automatic overscoring and overscoring reset CONTROL CODE ESC 1 CONTROL CODE ESC O DISABLES AUTOMATIC OVERSCORING Plot Even Dot P Series High Density Graphics ASCII Code EOT SFCC d Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 04 SFCC 64 4 SFCC 100 Prints dots at the even numbered dot columns The even dot plot code is used for programming high density graphics and must be used in conjunction with the Odd Dot Plot code hex 05 See P Series Compatible Plot Mode Odd Even Dot Plotting on page 278 for detailed plot mode information Plot Odd Dot P Series Normal Density Graphics ASCII Code ENQ SFCCe Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 05 SFCC 65 5 SFCC 101 Prints dots at the odd numbered dot columns This is the P Series programming normal density graphics control code The ENQ code should occur before any printable data in the data stream For high density graphics the Even Dot Plot code hex 04 must be used in conjunction with and precede the Odd Dot Plot code See P Series Compatible Plot Mode Odd Even Dot Plotting on page 278 for detailed plot
254. se Comment OA 10 Prints the data in the buffer if any and advances the vertical character position one line at the current line space setting If configured for LF equals new line LF CR LF the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 of the new line Otherwise the logical print head does not move when configured for LF function only LF LF ONLY The LF function cancels all single line print attributes such as double high elongated and double wide expanded characters This code is always configured for LF CR LF in the P Series protocol In the P Series Even Dot Plot mode high density graphics the LF code does not cause paper position motion the data in the buffer is plotted and the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 in anticipation of the Odd Dot Plot control code to complete high density graphic plotting In the P Series Odd Dot Plot mode normal density graphics the LF code plots the data in the buffer advances the paper position a single dot row at the current vertical dot density and positions the logical print head at character column 1 47 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emulation with Control Codes Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi ASCII Code SFCC2 SFCC LPI n Hex Code SFCC 32 Dec Code SFCC 50 Purpose Sets line spacing to 6 Ipi or as set by SFCC A Comment For SFCC LPI n the value of n can be 6 or 8 only If n 6 this command sets line spacing to 1 6 inch
255. sion must include the appropriate dot density control code the exact number of data bytes to be plotted and the data themselves The general Bit Image expression is as follows ESC CC n1 n2 DATA where ESC the Epson Serial Matrix or Proprinter XL compatible header CC K L Y or Z to select dot density K single L double Y double density double speed and Z quad density n1 n2 the number of data bytes to be printed data the dot pattern bytes The values for n1 and n2 must be specified in the control code expression They are defined as follows n1 number of data bytes MOD 256 n2 INT number of data bytes 256 The modulus arithmetic operator MOD refers to the integer value that is the remainder of an integer division The INT operator refers to integer division and is denoted by the slash character Therefore n1 is the remainder of the number of data bytes divided by 256 and n2 is the integer value of the number of data bytes divided by 256 n1 number of data bytes n2 x 256 n2 number of data bytes 256 If the number of data bytes to be printed is less than 256 n2 equals zero and n1 equals the number of data bytes to be printed The following examples illustrate the procedure to determine the Bit Image program statement Print 450 data bytes single density n2 450 256 1 n1 450 1x256 194 The program statement is ESC K 194 1 DATA Print 700 data bytes single density n
256. son FX 1050 however this code does not double the inter character spacing The formulas for total character spacing are as follows Epson FX 10502 char 1 dot space Epson Emulation2 char 1 dot space Example The following sample illustrates double wide character printing CONTROL CODE ESC W 1 SELECTS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE ESC W O RESETS EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING 172 Double Wide Print 1 Line Double Wide Print 1 Line ASCII Code SO ESC SO Hex Code OE 1B OE Dec Code 14 27 14 Purpose Selects double wide print for one line only Comment This control code is a line by line print attribute when SO or ESC SO is received the characters on the current line print twice as wide then automatically reset t This control code is cancelled by the DC4 code or by a CR code as in the Epson FX 1050 It is also cancelled by a paper motion control code LF VT etc as in the IBM Proprinter III XL t Like the Epson FX 1050 this control code doubles the character width Unlike the Epson FX 1050 however this code does not double the inter character spacing The formulas for total character spacing are as follows Epson FX 10502 char 1 dot space Epson Emulation2 char 1 dot space Example The following sample illustrates double wide print for one line CONTROL CODE SO SELECTS only EXPANDED CHARACTER PRINTING FOR ONE LINE ONLY Double Wide Print 1 Line Cancel ASCII Code
257. srrrserirsrrrerrrreren 120 Escape Control Code Header 120 Attribute Set and Reset Codes 120 Control Code Index AAA 121 BACKS PAC PEE 123 Belle ee PERS 123 Bit Image Mode Single Density sssesssss 124 Bit Image Mode Double Density 124 Bit Image Mode Double Density Double Speed 125 Bit Image Mode Quadruple Density eeseeessss 125 Bold Print Sets ui eter etri ener radi ates 126 Bold Print Cancel 126 Bottom Margin Get 127 Table of Contents Bottom Margin Cancel 127 GANS EE 128 Carriage Hetum enne nnne nnne 128 Carriage Return Gei 129 Character Pitch Tee ete ee e ette nda 129 Characters 80 9F Control Codes 129 Characters 80 9F Printable Gwvmbols A 129 Condensed Print sese eene 130 Condensed Print Reset ssssssssssseeeeeeeeneennene 130 Deselect Printet iiec eter re RR EUR Pee Ue Ert 131 Emphasized Print ia en a A a a 131 Emphasized Print Heset A 131 Expanded Double Wide Prmt AAA 132 Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only 133 Expanded Double Wide Print Reset 1 Line 133 Fam Feed nte ee do ed ded eds 134 Forms Length Set nches 134 Forms Length Set Lines 135 Horizontal Tab 135 Horizontal Tab Set Reset ssssssssssssseeeeeeenennes 136 Horizontal Vertical Tabs Clear sese 136 Initiali
258. ssesseseeenneee 206 Character Set Selection UTF8 T5000r Only 209 Character Spacing n 240 Inch sssseeeeeeee 209 Font Selection deti etae ted i RANES 209 Blue EE 211 TrueType Font Selection esses 212 Form Length and With AAA 212 Host Form RTE 213 Horizontal Movements in Printer Resolution 214 POX Data eerte ee esee e ee EE 214 Line Spacing n 288 Inch sse 214 Page Orientation Select sssssssssseeeeeeenees 215 Print Erngine Optiohs nte leet en 217 Printer Protocol Select sssssssssssseeeeenenernnn nnn 225 Software Page Elec nennen 225 Bar Cod6S pte ertet teer Ate Eeer 226 Bar Code Format essent ea aiioe ka 227 Australian 4 State i ene ce i e ette 232 le EE 234 ie E RE 236 Code 993 EE 238 GOdGN 2B eae ae Ada eitis M 240 EAN B gt et ted Ee e Uf ea 245 EAN 19 5 uet Ee toast termes totes 246 E 247 Interleaved 2 5 I 2 5 and German 1 2 5 sues 249 EK ee EE 250 MS RE 252 Table of Contents PostBar and Royal Mail 254 POSTNET 2d oe tese t rece epe bere Pete tes 255 RRE EE 256 UCC EAN EE 258 TEE 263 HG uem ete adig mde 265 UPC Shipping cere meh ple enit dendritic 268 UPS c PN 269 MEC EE LE 271 Productio a n A E 271 Bit Image Graphics sssssssssseses eene nennen 272 Plotting a Bit Image Pat
259. st 2nd ist 2nd CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER CHARACTER ODD COLUMNS ODD COLUMNS ASCII DECIMAL ASCII DECIMAL 1357911 35 7 911 Ww Wy 4 42 2 64 y EN F 9 0 0 0 EN 1 64 4 AS e fe 64 DOT ROW 65 64 64 65 Figure 34 Odd Dot Plot Pattern Plan The following program uses the Odd Dot Plot control code to produce the image The image is printed 25 times as shown in Figure 35 An entire dot row is plotted in one printing pass Consequently the first row of all 25 images is printed in one pass followed by the second row etc until all rows have been printed 10 LPRINT Odd Dot Plot 20 FOR I 1 TO 8 30 READ R1 40 READ R2 50 LPRINT CHR 5 60 FOR N 1 TO 25 70 LPRINT CHR R1 CHRS R2 80 NEXT N 90 LPRINT 100 NEXT I 110 DATA 42 64 73 65 92 64 42 64 73 65 92 64 42 64 73 65 120 LPRINT e Dot Plot Figure 35 Sample Odd Dot Plot To Exit the P Series Plot Mode To Exit the P Series Plot Mode When returning to the print mode from the P Series Plot Mode an extra line feed should be included in the data stream to maintain proper print line registration relative to the last line of plot graphics If the extra line feed is not included the first character line after the graphics data may be truncated as shown in Figure 36 E plot data M amp plot data I ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR A text line follows plot data A text line follows plot data but is preceded by a single
260. stance set is equal or greater than the form length printing is only allowed on the top line of each page This feature is disabled whenever vertical tabs are set Bottom margin can also be selected from the control panel however vertical tabs within the bottom margin zone as set by the control panel are ignored The control code bottom margin setting from the host computer overrides the control panel setting Bottom Margin Cancel ASCII Code ESC O alpha O Hex Code 1B 4F Dec Code 27 79 Purpose Resets bottom margin to zero 127 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Cancel ASCII Code CAN Hex Code 18 Dec Code 24 Purpose Clears the print buffer of all printable symbols since the last paper motion command was received Comment This control code may be used as a delete line function but should be used with extreme care to avoid possible misprinting This control code cancels the double wide attribute set by SO if active No other print attributes are affected Carriage Return ASCII Code CR Hex Code OD Dec Code 13 Purpose Returns the logical print head to the first character column resets the pointer to the first character position Comment The CR code may or may not cause printing or paper motion depending on the DEFINE CR CODE configuration parameter value If the DEFINE CR CODE submenu displays Define CR Code CR CR the characters foll
261. start stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code Code 93 Data Field The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to represent an extensive character set The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules Readable Data The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar code data It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol Check Digit The modulo 103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol The check digit verifies accurate scanning The start code is included in the check digit algorithm 238 Table 68 Code 93 Character Set Code 93 Character Hex Character Hex 0 0 P 50 1 1 Q 51 2 2 R 52 3 3 S 53 4 4 T 54 5 5 U 55 6 6 V 56 7 7 W 57 8 8 X 58 9 9 Y 59 A 41 Z 5A B 42 2D C 43 2E D 44 SPACE 20 E 45 3F F 46 2F G 47 t 2B H 48 K 25 49 S1 n a J 4A S2 n a K 4B S3 n a L 4C S4 n a M 4D Start n a N 4E Stop n a O 4F 239 Chapter 7 Bar Codes Code 128 The Code 128 structure is shown in Figure 10 and described below OPTIONAL CHECK DIGIT I UPPER GUARD BAND SE Regen I QUIET START DATA FIELD STOP QUIET d SR SC POSITION 9 E E E 1 T LOWER GUARD BAND J I I loo OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD Figure 10 Code 128 Structure Quiet Zone Both
262. string Do not include the brackets in your command These bar codes cannot be rotated or scaled If there is a printable data field in the bar code specification it prints in the Letter Gothic LG font except for UPC A and UPC E which print in OCR B Bar codes cannot be positioned beyond the bottom or right end of the currently defined logical form The command syntax prevents positioning the cursor above the current position or to the left of the form Drawing a bar code causes the printer to automatically switch to print mode The LG print mode is active until the bottom of the bar code has been printed After this you can change the print mode You can change the print mode to OCR A OCR B or back to LG between the current cursor location and the bottom of the bar code position Print mode changes to Courier are ignored in this region where t type of bar code see Table 62 227 Chapter 7 Bar Codes Table 62 Bar Code Type Codes t Selects Bar ASCII Hex Code H 48 Australian 4 State B 42 Codabar C 43 Code 39 9 39 Code 93 D 44 Code 128 8 38 EAN 8 1 31 EAN 13 F 46 FIM G 47 German I 2 5 49 Interleaved 2 5 A 58 Maxicode t Selects Bar ASCII Hex Code M 4D MSI 4 34 PDF 417 O AF PostBar P 50 POSTNET R 51 Royal Mail T 54 Telepen V 56 UCC EAN 128 A 41 UPC A E 45 UPC E S 53 UPC Shipping U 55 UPS 11 NOTE For all of the following parameters the digits a
263. t A OG e oa 0 a i N n Oo Uu i c i n u H 4 c 8 T 6 u 4 Ge E J i This control code setting overrides a character set selection made at the operator panel The following example illustrates international character selection using the IBM PC character set CONTROL CODE ESC R 5 SELECTS THE SWEDISH CHARACTER SET SHOWN BENEATH THE USA CASCII CHARACTERS 167 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0 ASCII Code ESC Hex Code 1B3D Dec Code 27 61 Purpose Sets the most significant bit MSB of all incoming data to 0 Comment The MSB is bit number 7 This command only affects text and control code data Graphics data pass through unchanged Some applications always set the MSB of print data to one 1 which results in italic or graphics printing in Epson printers This command overcomes the problem NOTE This command does not suppress hexadecimal FF from printing Condensed Print ASCII Code SI ESC SI Hex Code OF 1B OF Dec Code 15 27 15 Purpose Condenses print pitch as close to 60 of the former character width as possible up to 20 characters per inch Comment The condensed print command affects all subsequent characters After the printer receives code SI all characters are printed condensed approximately 60 of the width of normal characters until the printer is r
264. t LinePrinter Plus Emulation configuration options directly from the printer control panel or by the software commands described in Chapters 2 through 7 of this manual Your User s Manual also contains detailed configuration menus and diagrams as well as descriptions of each configuration parameter available with your printer NOTE You must also enter and exit the LinePrinter Plus Emulation configuration menu according to your printer User s Manual configuration procedures Pressing an invalid key to enter a parameter value may move you to another level in the configuration or exit the configuration menu completely 19 Chapter 1 Introduction 20 2 P Series Printer Protocol Introduction This chapter describes the P Series emulation host control codes Emulation refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of a particular printer control language A printer control language is the coding system used to convey manipulate and print data It contains character codes and command sequences that configure the emulation In this manual the terms emulation printer protocol and printer control language are synonymous In the P Series emulation mode your printer can print files coded for the P Series printer control language To select the P Series emulation mode as the active printer emulation select P Series from the Printer Control menu as described in the User s Manual The P Series emulation provides man
265. t Set IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 126 Serial Matrix Emulation 86 Bold Print P Series Emulation 29 Bottom Margin Cancel IBM Proprinter Ill XL Emulation 127 Bottom Margin IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation 127 C Calibrate Print engine options 217 Cancel IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 128 Serial Matrix Emulation 87 Cancel Line Epson FX 1050 Emulation 165 Carriage Return Epson FX 1050 Emulation 165 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 128 P Series Emulation 30 P Series XQ Emulation 67 Serial Matrix Emulation 88 Carriage Return Set IBM Proprinter Ill XL Emulation 129 Caution 17 Channel assignment P Series EVFU 287 Character Pitch 10 cpi Epson FX 1050 Emulation 165 Serial Matrix Emulation 88 Character Pitch 12 cpi Epson FX 1050 Emulation 165 IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 129 Serial Matrix Emulation 89 Character Pitch 15 cpi Epson FX 1050 Emulation 166 Character set overlay download 36 Character Set Select P Series Emulation 31 Serial Matrix Emulation 89 Character set selection UTF 8 Super Set Programming 209 326 Character Set Selection Super Set Programming 206 Character spacing n 240 inch Super Set Programming 209 Characters 80 9F Control Codes IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 129 P Series Emulation 33 Serial Matrix Emulation 91 Characters 80 9F Printable Symbols IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 129 P Series Emulation 33 Serial Matrix Emulation 91 92 Clear bit 7 of incoming
266. t attributes More information on vertical tabs is provided in Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting 115 Chapter 116 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Vertical Tab Set Clear ASCII Code ESC B n1 n2 n3 nk NUL Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example CONTROL CODE 1B 42 n1 n2 n3 nk 00 27 66 n1 n2 n3 nkO Sets vertical tab positions n1 through nk specify the line number for the vertical tab s for a maximum of 16 tab positions NUL must be used as the sequence terminator The physical position on the paper is the product of n and the current line spacing Subsequent line spacing changes do not change the tab position If the value of n defines a tab stop that exceeds the forms length that tab position is ignored In Serial Matrix printer protocol vertical tab positions are set by control code ESC B and executed by control code VT The tab positions must be in ascending order or the sequence terminates More information on Serial Matrix vertical tab setting is provided in Chapter 9 Vertical Page Formatting If the ESC B command is followed immediately by NUL the vertical tab positions are cleared The following sample illustrates Vertical Tab Setting ESC B 15 20 O SETS A VERTICAL TAB AT LINE 15 AND AT LINE 20 CONTROL CODE VT MOVES PAPER TO THE NEXT VERTICAL TAB CONTROL CODE VT MOVES PAPER TO THE NEXT VERTICAL TAB THIS IS LINE TWENTY 5 IBM Proprint
267. t control code character G as follows Ascii ESC G Hex 1B 47 Dec 27 71 Attribute Set and Reset Codes Certain print attributes are set and reset turned on or off by using the appropriate ESC code sequence and the hexadecimal numbers 01 03 all odd or 00 02 all even Expanded Print Superscript Subscript Print and Underline are attributes that are set reset in this fashion Control Code Index Control Code Index The following index lists the control codes by function and lists the ASCII mnemonic and page number NOTE Some control code functions can be accomplished using another control code sequence or via control panel selection FUNCTION Paper Motion Form Feed Line Feed Line Feed n 216 Inch 1 Line Only Vertical Tab Page Format Backspace Bottom Margin Set Bottom Margin Set Cancel Cancel Carriage Return Carriage Return Set Forms Length Set Inches Forms Length Set Lines Horizontal Tab Horizontal Tab Set Reset Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi Line Spacing 7 72 Inch 10 3 Ipi Line Spacing n 72 Inch Line Spacing n 216 Inch Margins Left Right Set Select Proportional Spacing Top of Form Vertical Tab Set Clear Print Attributes Bold Print Set Bold Print Cancel Condensed Print Condensed Print Reset Character Pitch 12 cpi Emphasized Print Emphasized Print Reset Expanded Double Wide Print Expanded Double Wide Print One Line Only AS
268. t control codes can override many of the settings for these menu options Table 1 P Series Default Settings Characteristic Default Setting Select CPI Select LPI Typeface Character Group Character Set Primary Subset Extended Subset Horizontal DPI Vertical DPI Prop Spacing Italic Print Slashed Zero Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Print Char Set Define CR code Auto LF Define LF code Advanced User Control Code 06 Control Code 08 Bold 10 0 CPI 6 0 LPI Letter Gothic Standard Sets IBM PC ASCII USA Code Page 437 120 DPI 72 DPI Enable Disable Disable 0 characters 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces CR CR Disable LF CR LF 8 0 LPI Elongated Disable P Series Default Values and States Table 1 P Series Default Settings Characteristic Default Setting Overstrike Select SFCC EVFU Select Alt Set 80 9F SFCC d command PSeries Dbl High FF valid at TOF Text Position Host Command Reset Cmd CFG Ld Form Length Form Length Form Length Form Width Form Width Form Width Enable 1 Enable Control Code Even dot plot Normal Enable Bottom of Line Enable Disable 06 0 inches 152 4 mm 36 lines 08 5 inches 216 0 mm 85 characters Advanced User must be enabled under the Printer Control Menu in order for the Advanced User parameters to be visible and changeable 23 Chapter 2 Configuring the P Series Emu
269. ta General Corporation Dataproducts is a registered trademark of Dataproducts Corp DEC is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation Epson is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation HP and LaserJet are registered trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company LinePrinter Plus PGL ThermaLine and Printronix are registered trademarks of Printronix Inc NCR is a registered trademark of NCR Corporation Okidata is a registered trademark of OKI America Inc Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens Corporation Unisys is a registered trademark of Unisys Corporation UPS is a registered trademark of United Parcel Service of America Inc This product uses Intellifont Scalable typefaces and Intellifont technology Intellifont is a registered trademark of Agfa Division Miles Incorporated Agfa CG Garth Graphic Intellifont and Type Director are registered trademarks and Shannon and CG Triumvirate are trademarks of Agfa Division Miles Incorporated Agfa CG Bodoni CG Century Schoolbook CG Goudy Old Style CG Melliza Microstyle CG Omega and CG Palacio are products of Agfa Corporation CG Times based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype Corporation Plc is a product of Agfa Univers is a registered trademark of Linotype AG and or its subsidiaries Letraset is a registered trademark and Aachen Revue and University Roman are trademarks of Esselte Pendaflex Corporation Futura is a registered trademar
270. ted page where n 1 through 127 hex 01 through 7F to select the number of lines to skip If the value of n exceeds the current form s length it is ignored Comment The actual distance set is the product of n and the current line spacing Factory default value disables bottom margin The current default value may be set by the operator Setting a new forms length ESC C resets bottom margin to zero This feature is disabled whenever vertical tabs are set The bottom margin can also be selected from the control panel however vertical tabs within the bottom margin zone as set by the control panel are ignored The control code bottom margin setting from the host computer overrides the control panel setting 112 Skip Over Perforation Cancel Skip Over Perforation Cancel ASCII Code ESC O alpha O Hex Code Dec Code Purpose 1B 4F 27 79 Resets bottom margin to zero Superscript Subscript Printing ASCII Code ESC S n Hex Code Dec Code Purpose where Comment Example 1B 53n 27 83 n Selects superscript or subscript printing n 0 to enable superscript printing hex 00 or hex 30 n 1 to enable subscript printing hex 01 or hex 31 Superscript Subscript font prints at one half the normal vertical character height and at twice the normal vertical density When the superscript subscript control code is received all characters are superscript or subscript until reset by the superscript subscript r
271. tempt to provide the operator with a description of what steps to take to correct the error Normally the solution will involve optimizing the Flash File System This can be accomplished by selecting the Optimize amp Reboot function in the Flash File System menu under MAINT MISC NOTE After selecting the Optimize amp Reboot function do not shut off the printer s power until after the printer returns to the power on state Loss of power during the optimize process may corrupt the printer s program If this occurs first attempt to repeat the downloading process If that fails contact an authorized service representative 303 Appendix B The PTR SETUP Commands 304 C Character Library In the P Series emulation character set overlays substitution tables can be downloaded SFCC V and stored until needed Using the Downloading Character Sets feature allows you to download a character set overlay which can be placed within the 224 printable symbol code points The character library on the following pages identifies each character s location in printer memory by its decimal address value 305 Appendix C 306 Address Table in Decimal 000 001 002 003 004_ 005 006 007 008 009 010 O11 012 013 014 015 015 017 018 019 020 L i ca 1 2 3 b g v Cc 4 5 A E M E CU C x or 67 89 At Y os ie 1 tr H m zl 02
272. tern A 273 Bit Image Density EE 275 Bit Image Programming Format 276 P Series Compatible Plot Mode Odd Even Dot Plotting 278 Plot Density3 iia p cm b oai c eccle ed 278 Plot Data Byte Format tiet pestes 279 Plot Data Line Formal AA 280 Plotting IRC EE 282 To Exit the P Series Plot Mode 283 Combining Graphics and Text 283 9 Vertical Page Formatting 285 dure e TTT 285 General P Series EVFU Programming Information seeeeeeeeeeeeeee 285 VFU Load Save Clear sssesseseseeeeeneee nennen 286 TG WEE 287 Start Load Code Hex 1E or 6E ecccceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeneeeee 287 Channel Assignment nennen 287 End Load Code Hex 1F or 6F ssssssssssseeeeeee 288 Using the EVFEU eene nee tret pereo pr Reik dean nndis 288 Clearing the EVFU Memory seseeeeenennnennne 290 Relative Line Glewing 291 Serial Matrix VFL 292 Executing Vertical Tabs A 293 Vertical Tab Positions eseeeeeeeee nnne 293 Table of Contents A B n m oco o Standard ASCII Character Set 295 PTR SETUP OPON oei 297 O EAT A E AE EEN 297 The PTR_SETUP Commande 297 GOMIMANGS incus eec e ere 298 Character EES o RE D de nens 305 P Series Plot Byte Definition 311 Elle e 313 Contact Information ccccccccsssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeees 323 Printronix Customer
273. the printer from processing data received from the host computer Discussion This code is for diagnostic use it instructs the printer to stop processing data received from the host system In order to resume processing data the printer must be reset from the host system Emphasized Print ASCII Code ESC E Hex Code 1B 45 Dec Code 2769 Purpose X Selects emphasized character print format Comment When the emphasized print control code is received all characters are printed in emphasized print until reset by the emphasized print reset control code or printer reset Emphasized print is ignored during superscript or subscript printing and when 15 20 cpi characters have been selected Example The following sample illustrates emphasized character printing CONTROL CODE ESC E SELECTS EMPHASIZED CHARACTER PRINTING CONTROL CODE ESC F CANCELS EMPHASIZED CHARACTER PRINTING Emphasized Print Reset ASCII Code ESC F Hex Code 1B 46 Dec Code 2740 Purpose Resets emphasized character printing Comment The emphasized print reset control code only resets the emphasized print character attribute Example See Emphasized Print for an example of Emphasized Print Reset 131 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Expanded Double Wide Print ASCII Code ESC W n Hex Code 1B57n Dec Code 2787n Purpose Selects or resets expanded double wide print where if n 1 3 5 any odd v
274. the remainder is added to the next paper motion command Small values of n may result in overlapping lines Overlapping lines may also occur if print attributes such as Elongated Double High Superscript or Subscript characters are used on the same line Printing at different horizontal and vertical densities do not overlap Example The following example illustrates n 216 inch line spacing CONTROL CODE ESC J 200 PERFORMS A 200 216 INCH LINE FEED FUNCTION FOR ONE LINE ONLY 140 Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 Ipi ASCII Code ESC 2 ESC An Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example 1B 32 27 50 ESC 2 sets line spacing to 6 Ipi or as set by ESC A The value of n should be 12 if using ESC A n ESC 2 asserts n 72 inch line spacing as set by ESC A page 134 If no distance has been set by ESC A the distance is 1 6 inch The control code line spacing selection overrides the control panel line spacing setting The following example illustrates 1 6 inch line spacing and assumes that a distance has not been set by ESC A CONTROL CODE ESC 2 SETS LINE SPACING AT 6 LPI FOR ALL SUBSEQUENT LINES UNTIL RESET OR ANOTHER SPACING IS SELECTED Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Ipi ASCII Code ESC 0 ESC An Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment Example 1B 30 27 48 Specifies continuous line spacing at 1 8 inch increments 8 Ipi The value of n should be 9 if using ESC A n When the 1
275. ting and accessing CONTROL CODE ESC D CHR C4O CHR C10 CHR CO SETS TAB STOPS AT COLUMNS 4 AND 10 CONTROL CODE HT ACCESSES THE TAB STOPS AS FOLLOWS COLUMN 4 COLUMN 10 Line Feed ASCII Code LF Hex Code 0A Dec Code 10 Purpose Prints the data in the buffer if any and advances the vertical character postion one line at the current line space setting Comment If configured for LF equals newline LF CR LF the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 of the new line Otherwise the logical print head does not move when configured for LF function only LFZLF ONLY The LF function cancels all single line print attributes such as double high elongated and double wide expanded characters 103 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Line Feed n 216 Inch One Line Only ASCII Code ESC Jn Hex Code 1B4An Dec Code 2774n Purpose Advances the vertical character position n 216 inch for one line only where n 1 through 255 Comment The n 216 inch line feed control code is effective for one line only All single line only print attributes are canceled If the protocol is configured for LF equals newline LF CR LF the paper advances one line at the current line space setting and the logical print head is positioned at character column 1 The paper position moves only in multiples of the current dot row spacing If the distance to move is other than a multiple of the curr
276. torage hard disk floppy diskette RAM etc To turn off deactivate disable or return to a previous state A measure expressing the number of component units in a given range used to create an image in printing expressed as the number of dots per inch dpi horizontally and vertically Read Only Memory Programs instructions and routines permanently stored in the printer ROM is not lost when power is turned off and cannot be written to hence the name read only ROM resident fonts are permanently stored in a printer and available at any time via software commands Compare with RAM 319 Appendix E _ Glossary 320 Serial communications Set SFCC Shadow printing Slewing SSCC Start bit Stop bits String Substitution Table Symbol set True Type style Typeface Typographic font S The sequential transmission of data in which each element is transferred in succession To turn on activate invoke or enable Special Function Control Character The first character in a printer command sequence In P Series emulation mode you can select one of five characters as the SFCC In the Serial Matrix or Proprinter protocols the SFCC must always be the ASCII ESC character See also command sequence A typeface with a heavy line thickness produced when the characters doublestrike just offset of the original characters See also character weight Compare with bold print Rapid vertical pa
277. trol Codes Horizontal Tab Set Reset ASCII Code ESC D n1 n2 nk NUL Hex Code 1B 44 n1 n2 nk 00 Dec Code 2768 n1 n ok Purpose Sets up to 28 horizontal tab positions where n1 through n28 specify the character column of the tab positions NUL is the sequence terminator Comment Up to 28 different tab positions may be set The values must be listed in ascending order or they are ignored The physical tab position is the product of n and the current cell width 1 pitch excluding double wide Tabs in excess of 28 or those positioned beyond the paper s right margin are also ignored Tab positions may be cleared by sending the ESC D NUL sequence Powering the printer on off initializes the tabs to every eighth character column Horizontal tabs are accessed by control code HT Example The following example illustrates horizontal tab setting and accessing CONTROL CODE ESC D CHR 4 CHR C10 2 CHR CO2D SETS TAB STOPS AT COLUMNS 4 AND 10 CONTROL CODE HT ACCESSES THE TAB STOPS AS FOLLOWS COLUMN 4 COLUMN 10 Horizontal Vertical Tabs Clear ASCII Code ESC R Hex Code 1B52 Dec Code 2782 Purpose Clears all horizontal and vertical tab stops Comment Horizontal tab stops are reinitialized to every 8 columns starting at column 1 i e 1 9 17 136 Initialize Parameters Initialize Parameters ASCII Code ESC K n1 NUL n2 n3 n4 n5 Hex Code 1B 5B 4B n1 00 n2 n3 n4 n5 Dec Code 2791 75 n1 0 n2 n3 n4 n
278. trols the paper feed mechanism on Epson printers Comment The printer ignores this command Define a Download Character ASCII Code ESC amp Hex Code 1B26 Dec Code 2738 Purpose Defines a download character TComment The printer ignores this command and removes all downloaded font data from the data stream Delete Character ASCII Code DEL Hex Code 7F Dec Code 127 Purpose Deletes the previous character on a line Comment This command is ignored if it occurs immediately after a CR or a paper motion command Characters truncated due to line length restrictions are not affected by this code 169 Chapter 6 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes Double High Print Set Reset ASCII Code ESC wn Hex Code 1B77n Dec Code 27119n Purpose Turns double high character printing on and off Double high characters are standard width but twice as high where n hex 1 or hex 31 turns double high printing on n hex 0 or hex 30 turns double high printing off Comment The OCR A and OCR B fonts cannot be printed in double high NOTE It is recommended to use double Line Feeds and Carriage Returns when double high character printing is on after an ESC w control code has been sent or else the printer overstrikes text that has already printed T If Superscript Subscript ESC S or Condensed Print SI is combined with Double High printing only Double High printing OCCUIS Example The following
279. ttern 273 Bit image programming format 276 combining graphics and text 283 Exit P Series plot mode 283 overview 271 Plot data byte format 279 Plot data line format 280 Plot density 278 Plotting data 282 P Series compatible plot mode 278 Graphics Double Density Double Speed Epson FX 1050 Emulation 179 Graphics Double Emulation 178 Graphics Quadruple Density Emulation 180 Graphics Standard Density Emulation 177 Density Epson FX 1050 Epson FX 1050 Epson FX 1050 329 H Half Speed Mode On Off Epson FX 1050 Emulation 180 Hex 80 9F Control Codes Epson FX 1050 Emulation 187 Hex 80 9F Printable Epson FX 1050 Emulation 187 Horizontal Image Shift Print engine options 218 Horizontal movements in printer resolution Super Set Programming 214 Horizontal Tab IBM Proprinter IIl XL Emulation 135 Serial Matrix Emulation 102 Horizontal Tab Execute Epson FX 1050 Emulation 181 Horizontal Tab Set Serial Matrix Emulation 103 Horizontal Tab Set Release Epson FX 1050 Emulation 181 Horizontal Tab Set Reset IBM Proprinter Ill XL Emulation 136 Horizontal Vertical Tabs Clear IBM Proprinter III XL Emulation 136 Host Form Size Super Set Programming 213 IBM Proprinter Ill XL Emulation Attribute set codes 120 Backspace 123 Bell 123 Bit image mode double density 124 Bit image mode double density double speed 125 Bit image mode quadruple density 125 Bit image mode single density 124 Bold
280. typeface Enter the five digit number representing the selected typeface Fixed pitch spacing is used for the Letter Gothic DP Courier NLQ OCR A and OCR B typefaces All others use proportional spacing The standard fonts available are Courier 93950 Letter Gothic 93777 OCR A 90993 OCR B 91409 and CG Times 92500 Parameter n2 is a 1 digit bold flag n2 0 disable bold 1 enable bold Parameter n3 selects a 1 digit slant flag Slant is similar to italic but also offers a backward slant n3 0 disable slant 1 right slant 2 left slant Parameter n4 selects a 3 digit symbol set Table 49 n4 Value Symbol Sets Proprinter XL 000 Code Page 437 P Series 001 Code Page 850 000 IBM PC 001 Multinational 002 ECMA 94 Latin 1 003 DEC Multinational Epson 000 IBM PC 005 Code Page 850 Parameter n5 selects a 4 digit character width in 1 480 inch units Parameter n6 selects a 4 digit character height in 1 288 inch units 211 Chapter 7 TheSuper Set Commands TrueType Font Selection ASCII Code SSCC fontname extension Hex Code SSCC 28 fontname 2E extension 3B Dec Code SSCC 40 fontname 46 extension 59 Purpose Selects a TrueType font fontname One to sixteen characters specifying the font name Period character separating the font name and extension extension One to six characters specifying the font extension Semicolon character terminate
281. ual Characters 80 9F Printable Symbols ASCII Code ESC 6 Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 1B 36 27 54 Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 through 9F are printable symbols Also includes hex codes 03 through 06 and 15 in the Serial Matrix printer protocol Cancels Character Set Select activated by ESC 7 or ESC u This feature is also selectable from the control panel see the Alternate Set 80 9F parameter in the configuration chapter of your User s Manual 91 Chapter 4 Configuring the Serial Matrix Emulation with Control Codes Characters 80 9F Printable Symbols ASCII Code ESC u Hex Code 1B75 Dec Code 27117 Purpose Selects the character set wherein hex codes 80 through 9F are printable symbols Hex codes 03 through 06 and 15 are treated like control codes Cancels Character Set Select activated by ESC 6 or ESC 7 Character Set Select International Languages ASCII Code ESCR n Hex Code 1B52n Dec Code 2782n Purpose Specifies the international language set identified by n in the basic character set selected from the control panel ECMA 94 Latin 1 IBM PC Multinational and DEC Multinational where n corresponds to the language as shown in Table 22 below Table 22 International Character Sets n Character Set Selected pes ECMALatin1 Pl Ost or Multinational SiS 0 30 ASCI USA ASCI USA ASCI USA ASCII USA 1 31 German French EBCDIC French 2 32 Swedis
282. uble Density Double Speed 85 Bit Image Mode Quadruple Density 86 Bit Image Mode Single Density 84 Bold print reset 87 Bold print set 86 Cancel 87 Carriage return 88 Character Pitch 10 cpi 88 Character Pitch 12 cpi 89 Character set select 89 Characters 80 9F Control Codes 91 Characters 80 9F Printable symbols 91 92 Condensed print 94 Condensed print reset 94 Control code descriptions 80 Control code index 81 Control codes 80 Default values 78 Delete 94 Elongated print set reset 96 Elongated print one line only 95 Emphasized print 96 Emphasized print reset 97 Emulation reset 97 Escape control code header 80 Expanded print 98 Expanded print one line only 98 Extended character set 99 Extended character set cancel 100 Form feed 100 Form margins 102 Forms length set 100 Forms length set lines 101 Horizontal tab 102 Horizontal tab set 103 International languages 92 Line feed 103 Line feed n 216 inch 104 Line spacing n 216 inch 107 Line spacing n 72 inch 106 Line spacing 1 6 inch 105 Line spacing 1 8 inch 105 Line spacing 7 72 inch 106 Overscoring 108 overview 77 Print mode Pitch selection 108 Printer deselect 112 Printer select 112 Reset Codes 80 Skip over perforation 112 Skip over perforation cancel 113 States 78 Superscript subscript printing 113 Superscript subscript printing reset 114 Super set commands 114 Underline 114 Vertical tab
283. ubsequent printable data preceding a paper motion command replace previous printable data including underlines Two exceptions apply e Subsequent underlined characters hex 5F overlay the previous data 67 Chapter 3 Configuring the XQ Emulation with Control Codes e Subsequent space characters hex 20 only index the character position indicator to the right This code can occur at any place in the datastream and is acted upon immediately With CR CR LF the underline add delete and edit functions are disabled and the code is processed as a line feed See the Line Feed command description on page 71 for more information Compressed Print ASCII Code SOH ETX HT Hex Code 01 03 09 Dec Code 1 3 9 NOTE Configure this feature from the control panel Purpose Selects compressed character printing Comment Use any of the three codes to select 17 1 cpi if you are configuring the printer from the operator control panel Both ETX and HT also select the Letter Gothic DP font if the printer is configured from the control panel see page 73 These commands can occur anywhere in the datastream and are acted upon immediately affecting the entire current print line Line spacing may be selected either through the control panel or by line spacing control codes The control code setting overrides the control panel line spacing setting Example IF THE COMPRESSED PRINT OPTION IS INSTALLED CONTROL CODE 01 HEX SELECTS
284. uence used to introduce the super set commands Comment Super set commands affect the ASCII Emulation as a whole regardless of the printer protocol currently active The commands are sent from the host in the data stream to the printer and provide the following capabilities e Select a printer protocol e Change the page orientation e Define various font attributes including typeface and print size e Select proportional fonts See Chapter 7 Super Set Programming for further information on the Super Set commands 200 Superscript and Subscript Printing Superscript and Subscript Printing ASCII Code ESC S n Hex Code 1B53n Dec Code 2783n Purpose Selects superscript or subscript printing where n NUL hex 00 or 0 hex 30 to enable superscript printing n SOH hex 01 or 1 hex 31 to enable subscript printing 1Comment Superscript Subscript font prints at one half the normal vertical character height and at twice the normal vertical density When the superscript subscript control code is received all characters are superscript or subscript until reset by the superscript subscript reset control code or printer reset Emphasized print is ignored in the superscript subscript print mode You can print both superscript and subscript characters in the same character column by using the Backspace BS control code but these characters do not print when double high printing is in effect If Superscript Subscri
285. umber system character is included in the check digit algorithm Table 75 Eleven Digit Compression 1 Manufacturer s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000 00999 X X 0 0 0o oo X X 1 0 0 first two digits of X X 2 0 0 manufacturer s number last three digits of the product number _ third digit of the manufacturer s number use 0 through 2 only 2 Manufacturer s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000 00999 X X 3 0 0 uem 3 X X 9 0 0 first three digits of last two digits of depends on how manufacturer s the product many digits number number use 00 appear in the 99 only manufacturer s number 3 Manufacturer s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000 00999 X X X X H dua sc _ 4 first four digits of last digit of depends on how manufacturer s product number many digits number use 0 through 9 appear in the only manufacturer s number 4 Manufacturer s Number Product Numbers that can be used 00000 00999 X X X X X aue e _ all five digits of last digit of manufacturer s product number number use 5 9 only 266 Table 76 Six Digit Zero Expansion If the 6 digit number ends with then the MFPS Number is UPC E and the Product Number is 1 0 Example 124560 2 1 Example 275831 the first 2 digits of the zero suppressed number plus 000 12000 the first two digits plus 100 27100 00 plus the T
286. w option is implemented 301 Appendix B The PTR SETUP Commands Table 81 PIR SETUP Commands continued Command Sub Command Parameter Description ENGINE IMAGE SHFT H Value Shifts the image Value horizontally in 1 1000 units If Value is out ofthe settable range 1 to 1 the command will be ignored IMAGE SHFT V Value Shifts the image Value vertically in 1 1000 units If Value is out of the settable range 1 to 6 the command will be ignored LENGTH Value Sets the Page Length in 1 1000 units MEDIA HANDLING Value Sets the type of media handling 0 Continuous 1 Tear Off Strip 2 Tear Off 3 Peel Off 4 Cut MODE X Sets the print mode to Thermal Transfer D Sets the print mode to Direct Thermal WIDTH Value Sets the Page Width in 1 1000 units PTR END none none Exits the PTR SETUP Summary of the CONFIG Command The UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD command can be used for uploading and downloading complete printer configurations If a customer needs to configure 50 printers identically the customer needs only configure one printer and UPLOAD the configurations The UPLOADed configurations may then be DOWNLOADed to other printers eliminating the necessity for the operator to configure each printer manually The UPLOAD command will always place a header and a footer into the uploaded data This header will be the DOWNLOAD command followed by the configuration
287. with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment For detailed information see the Bit Image section in Chapter 8 Example The following example produces Double Density Bit Image graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image Mode example Note that the amount of data must be doubled for double density the data is used 54 times rather than 27 DOUBLE DENSITY BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS i 84 Bit Image Mode Double Density Double Speed Bit Image Mode Double Density Double Speed ASCII Code ESC Y n1 n2 Hex Code 1B59n1n2 Dec Code 2789nin2 Purpose Selects Double Density Double Speed Bit Image graphics where n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment For detailed information see the Bit Image section in Chapter 8 Example The following example produces Double Density Double Speed Bit Image graphics of the pattern used in the Single Density Bit Image Mode example Note that the amount of data must be doubled for double density the data is used 54 times rather than 27 DOUBLE DENSITY DOUBLE SPEED BIT IMAGE GRAPHICS NNNWWNWNWNWWWNNNNNNWANN
288. x Codes 00 1F and 80 9FESC I n Make Hex 80 9F Control CodesESC 7 Make Hex 80 9F PrintableESC 6 Select Italic Character SetESC t n Data Manipulation Cancel Line t Clear Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 0 Delete Character Pass Bit 7 from Host Set Bit 7 of Incoming Data Bytes to 1 ASCII CODE SI or ESC SI DC2 ESCwn ESC G ESC H ESC Wn SO or ESC SO DC4 ESCE ESC F ESC 4 ESC 5 ESC Sn ESC T ESC n ESC amp ESC n ESC NUL n NUL ESCxn ESCkn ESC on 166 175 187 187 193 CAN ESC DEL ESC ESC gt PAGE 168 169 170 171 171 172 173 173 174 174 182 182 201 201 202 169 189 192 194 194 195 165 168 169 190 196 FUNCTION Graphics Graphics Standard Density Graphics Double Density Graphics Double Density Double Speed Graphics Quadruple Density Reassign Graphics Mode Select Graphics Mode Select 9 Pin Graphics Mode Other Functions Bell Cut Sheet Paper Feed Control Half Speed Mode On Off Initialize Printer Printer Deselect Printer Select Super Set Commands Unidirectional Printing 1 Line Unidirectional Printing Set Reset Control Code Index ASCII CODE ESC K n1 n2 ESC L n1 n2 ESC Y n1 n2 ESC Z n1 n2 ESC sm ESC mn1 n2 ESC m n1 n2 1 dk BEL ESC EM n ESCsn ESC Q DC3 DC1 ESC ESC lt ESC Un PAGE 177 178 179 180 191 192 193 164 169 180 182 191 191 200 202 202 163 Chapte
289. xample Bell 08 8 Moves the logical print head to the left one character space toward the first character column BS moves the character position indicator one character space to the left at the current character pitch setting The code is ignored if the logical print head is positioned at the first character column If you were to print five T characters then two BS commands then two characters the output would look like the sample below TTTFF ASCII Code BEL Hex Code Dec Code Purpose Comment 07 7 Sounds the printer s buzzer beeper The BEL function sounds the buzzer beeper for 0 2 seconds upon receipt of this command 123 Chapter 5 Configuring the Proprinter Ill XL Emulation with Control Codes Bit Image Mode Single Density ASCII Code ESC K n1 n2 Hex Code 1B4Bn n2 Dec Code 2775n1n2 Purpose Selects Single Normal Density Bit Image graphics where n1 256n2 define the number of data bytes to follow DATA ASCII characters for the dot pattern bytes NOTE The DATA can be expressed in a format with the appropriate decimal values of the ASCII characters supplied especially in cases where the dot patterns of nonprintable characters are required Comment For detailed information see the Bit Image section in Chapter 8 Graphics Example The following example produces a pattern of Single Density Bit Image graphics The 9 data bit pattern is repeated 27 times Compare this examp
290. y or type Fixed pitch fonts Font D One tenth of a point A unit of measurement equal to 1 720 inch See also point A value parameter attribute or option assigned by a program or system when another is not specified by the user Pertains to the detection and isolation of printer malfunctions or mistakes To deactivate or set to OFF E Refers to the ability of a printer to execute the commands of another printer language or protocol To activate or set to ON Two or more bytes that describe a specific printer control function In an escape sequence the first byte is always the ASCII ESC character See also command sequence SFCC A font enhancement referring to larger than normal character width with no change in character height F Off or zero Compare with true A set of all variations and sizes of a type style See font monospaced The complete set of a given size of type including characters symbols figures punctuation marks ligatures signs and accents To fully describe a font you must specify seven characteristics 1 type family 2 spacing proportional or monospaced 3 type size 12 point 14 point etc 4 scale factor character height width ratio 5 type style 6 character weight and 7 character proportion normal condensed expanded 315 Font Directory Font name Font pattern Font landscape Font monospaced Font portrait Font proportional Font we
291. y associated with the Dataproducts parallel interface Note that data bit 8 of the standard RS 232 interface can also be configured for use as the PI line The following information applies when programming and using a Vertical Format Unit Elongated Characters Elongated double high characters can be used within VFU programs The VFU automatically counts one line of elongated characters as two normal character lines 285 Chapter 9 General P Series EVFU Programming Information Paper Runaway Protection e When the VFU is selected but not loaded If a VFU command is sent from the host computer then the printer moves the paper a single line feed only e When the VFU is selected and the memory has been loaded If a channel code is sent from the host which is not a part of the assigned sequence currently in memory then the printer moves the paper a single line feed only Line Spacing The printer can use any line spacing with the VFU The VFU determines the forms length according to the program specifications and the currently selected line spacing Line spacing may be mixed on the same form but should be done with caution to avoid unpredictable results VFU Deselected If any VFU is deselected from the control panel the VFU data are ignored and the forms length definition returns to the previously set value The current print position becomes the top of form VFU Load Save Clear One VFU table can be saved in N
292. y configurable parameters The default parameter values for this emulation are shown in Table 1 You can modify the emulation parameter values in two ways e The P Series host control codes An extensive set of P Series control code commands can be sent to the printer from an attached host computer via the host data stream Most of this chapter is devoted to describing the P Series control code commands The printer configuration menus You can modify a subset of the P Series emulation parameters using the printer configuration menus control panel keys and LCD as described in the User s Manual A parameter value set by a host control code generally overrides a value set from the printer s control panel NOTE Configuration values selected from the menus or via host control codes can be saved to the printer s NVRAM memory so that they will not be lost when you power off the printer or reset it to the factory defaults The menu selection for saving a configuration to memory is described in the User s Manual To save the configuration using host control codes refer to Appendix B PID SETUP Option 21 Chapter 22 2 Introduction P Series Default Values and States The factory settings for the P Series emulation menu options are shown in Table 1 Table 1 also lists additional factory settings for parameters provided by the ASCII Emulation formatting menus The EMULATION menu options are described in the User s Manual Hos
293. y number of digits but is limited by the maximum form width c n sets the form width in number of characters n is the number of characters and can be any number of digits but is limited by the maximum form width period is the command terminator The form length and width can both be set in the same command The command format is as follows ASCII Code SSCC K L i n m n I n W i n m n c n Hex Code Dec Code SSCC 4B 4C 69 n 6D n 6C n 57 69 n 6D n 63 n 2E SSCC 75 76 105 n 109 n 108 n 87 105 n 109 n 99 n 46 Host Form Size ASCII Code SSCCH n Hex Code SSCC 48n Dec Code SSCC 72n Table 50 Host Form Size Values n Value hex Meaning 0 Disable The default setting Sets the form length equal to the Page Length value specified in the PRINTER CONTROL menu on the front panel 1 Enable The specified host form length does not affect the setting of the Page Length value in the PRINTER CONTROL menu on the front panel For more information on setting the Page Length from the printer s front panel see your User s Manual 213 Chapter 7 TheSuper Set Commands Horizontal Movements in Printer Resolution These commands move the current position horizontally in printer resolution dots ASCII Code SSCC Y n Hex Code SSCC59n Dec Code SSCC89n Purpose Define the relative horizontal movement from the current position where n four digit number specifying the move d
294. ze Parameters eene 137 Line FOC c 139 Line Feed n 216 Inch One Line On 140 Line Spacing 1 6 Inch 6 oi 141 Line Spacing 1 8 Inch 8 Io 141 Line Spacing 7 72 Inch 030 142 Line Spacing n 72 MCR irii isian inneren aa a aaan etea oaia 143 Line Spacing n 216 Inch 144 Margins Left Right Gei 144 EE le EEN 145 Print Control Codes AAA 145 Print One Control Code 145 Select Attributes eite ted Pene ict eem een 146 Select Font Print Mode 148 Select Proportional Spacing s sesseeseessressrresiserrterirsrrinerenserneenns 148 Superscript Subscript Printing sese 149 Superscript Subscript Printing Reset 149 Super Set Commande essen 150 Ree UE 150 Underlilie eegen i See GUI RE 150 Unidirectional Printing AA 151 Table of Contents Vertical Tab E 151 Vertical Tab Set Clear AA 152 6 Epson FX 1050 Printer Protocol 153 INTRODUCTIONS E 153 Epson FX 1050 Default Values and States 154 Epson Emulation Exceptions and Differences 156 Epson Character Ges 157 Configuring the Epson FX 1050 Emulation with Control Codes 158 Format for Control Code Descriptions 158 Escape Sequences nnns 158 Set and Reset Codes AAA 159 NUI Gode 5i tne eh ette tedg teet Pedes 159 Print Modes Supported for Character Ges 160 Control Code Index 161 lee 164 BG is
295. zontal DPI Vertical DPI Logical Form Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Physical Page Left Margin Right Margin Top Margin Bottom Margin Perforation Skip Form Length Absolute Length Funct of LPI Form Width Absolute Width Funct of CPI Host Command Portrait 10 0 6 0 Letter Gothic Disable Disable Disable Disable Top of Line 120 DPI 72 DPI 0 characters 0 characters 0 linespaces 0 linespaces 0 inches 0 inches 0 inches 0 inches Disable 6 0 inches 36 lines 4 1 inches 41 lines Enabled 155 Chapter 156 6 Introduction Epson Emulation Exceptions and Differences Because of mechanical differences between your printer and Epson printers moving printhead serial matrix printers some Epson features are approximated or not supported Epson codes that produce different behavior in your printer are indicated by a dagger in the Control Code Index and code section Epson bit image graphics are supported including all plotter and CRT densities Many character sets are available including IBM PC Graphics IBM Code Page 0437 and Epson You can configure the zero character to contain a slash or no slash Like the Epson FX 1050 the Double Wide print control codes ESC W SO double the character width Unlike the Epson FX 1050 however these codes do not double the inter character spacing The formulas for total character spacing are as follows E

LinePrinter Plus® Emulation for SL5000/T5000 series

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

LinePrinter Plus&reg; Emulation for SL5000/T5000 series

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

LinePrinter Plus® Emulation for SL5000/T5000 series